WO2023143125A1 - 一种信息更新方法以及通信装置 - Google Patents

一种信息更新方法以及通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023143125A1
WO2023143125A1 PCT/CN2023/072088 CN2023072088W WO2023143125A1 WO 2023143125 A1 WO2023143125 A1 WO 2023143125A1 CN 2023072088 W CN2023072088 W CN 2023072088W WO 2023143125 A1 WO2023143125 A1 WO 2023143125A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
information
location
network device
access network
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/072088
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
吴小宁
胡星星
陈取才
宗在峰
耿婷婷
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023143125A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023143125A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02—Services making use of location information
    • H04W4/029—Location-based management or tracking services
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/02—Processing of mobility data, e.g. registration information at HLR [Home Location Register] or VLR [Visitor Location Register]; Transfer of mobility data, e.g. between HLR, VLR or external networks
    • H04W8/08—Mobility data transfer
    • H04W8/14—Mobility data transfer between corresponding nodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00—Network topologies
    • H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/06—Airborne or Satellite Networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to an information updating method and a communication device.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device moves out of the current registration area, the terminal device needs to trigger the registration update process to report the current location of the terminal device to the core network, so that the core network can know the location change of the terminal device and configure a new location for the terminal device.
  • the paging area or registration area is used to facilitate subsequent paging management and service processing (for example, charging policy selection, handover management) and the like for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device will report the location information of the terminal device to the core network only after the registration update process is triggered, so that the core network cannot update the paging area or registration area of the terminal device in time according to the location information of the terminal device.
  • the present application provides an information update method and a communication device.
  • the present application provides a method for updating information, and the method involves access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the access network device receives first information from the core network device, where the first information is used to instruct the access network device to send the first location information of the terminal device to the core network device. Then, the access network device determines the first location information based on the first information. Then, the access network device sends the first location information to the core network device, and the first location information is used by the core network device to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device.
  • the first location information is used by the core network device to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device. It can be understood that the core network device determines the registration area of the terminal device based on the first location information, and/or, The area in which the end device is paged.
  • the core network device can report the location information of the terminal device determined by the access network device to the core network device according to the instruction of the core network device, the core network device can The location information of the terminal device is acquired in time and used to determine the paging area or registration area of the terminal device, which improves the timeliness and accuracy of paging management and/or registration management of the terminal device.
  • the core network device can obtain the location information of the terminal device without going through the registration update process, and the terminal device does not need to initiate an unnecessary registration update process to report the location information, it is beneficial to save the terminal device from triggering the registration update process. Signaling overhead.
  • this application is applicable to satellite communication scenarios.
  • the aforementioned access network device is a satellite.
  • the first location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the first reference position and the first distance threshold are configured by the core network device for the terminal device to trigger registration Update the parameters of the process.
  • the core network device before the core network device sends the first information to the access network device, the core network device has configured the aforementioned first reference location and first distance threshold for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device triggers a registration update procedure.
  • the registration update process includes that the terminal device uses the current location of the terminal device to update the first reference location, and the terminal device sends the current location of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device, so that the core network device uses The current location of the terminal device updates the first reference location.
  • the access network device can determine the target location based on the first information from the core network device before the terminal device triggers the registration update process, and send the target location to the core network device in the form of first location information, so as to This enables the core network device to determine a paging area and/or a registration area based on the received target location.
  • the core network device can obtain the target position of the terminal device before the registration update process is initiated, In this way, the core network device determines a new registration area based on the target location before the terminal device triggers the registration update process, so that the old registration area determined by the first reference location and the first distance threshold becomes invalid. Therefore, the terminal device no longer Triggering the registration update process based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold helps to save signaling overhead caused by the terminal device triggering the registration update process based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold.
  • the core network device since the target location of the terminal device can be reported to the core network device in time before the registration update process is triggered, it is beneficial for the core network device to know the current location of the terminal device accurately and in a timely manner. Precise paging area and/or registration area, which in turn helps core network equipment more accurately perform paging management and/or registration management on terminal equipment.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the target location indicated by the first location information sent by the access network device to the core network device satisfies the feature that the distance between the target location and the first reference location is smaller than the first distance threshold. Because, according to the registration update rule configured by the core network device, when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the terminal device will trigger the registration update process. However, the distance between the target location determined in this embodiment and the first reference location is smaller than the first distance threshold, that is, the condition for triggering the registration update procedure has not been met. Therefore, when the access network device reports the target location to the core network device, not only the terminal device will not trigger the registration update process, but also the location of the terminal device can be provided to the core network device.
  • the core network device determines a more accurate paging area and/or registration area, and further beneficial for the core network device to more accurately perform paging management and/or registration management on the terminal device.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined. It can also be understood that the core network device can determine the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold based on the first location information, and then, the core network device can determine the location where the terminal device is looking for based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold. call zone and/or registration zone.
  • the registration area and/or paging area are expressed in the form of parameters used to trigger the registration update process, rather than based on the tracking area code (tracking area code, TAC), therefore, not only It can be compatible with the registration update mechanism based on the reference location and the distance threshold, and can also improve the flexibility of indicating the registration area and/or the paging area.
  • TAC tracking area code
  • the second reference position is obtained by updating the first reference position based on the first position information.
  • the second distance threshold is obtained by updating the first distance threshold based on the first location information.
  • the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold according to the original configuration, before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold The registration area is updated, that is, the registration update process is no longer triggered based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the frequency of triggering registration update by the terminal device and reduce signaling overhead.
  • the access network device determining the first location information includes: the access network device sending second information to the terminal device according to the first information, where the second information is used to indicate that the The terminal device sends second location information to the access network device; the access network device receives the second location information from the terminal device, the second location information includes the target location, and the target location is the terminal device based on the first location information. The location of the terminal device determined by the second information; the access network device determines the first location information according to the second location information.
  • the access network device can determine the second information that needs to be sent to the terminal device based on the received first information, so that the terminal device can determine the target location based on the received second information and the location indicated by the second information. Report the target location of the terminal device to the access network device at an appropriate time. It is beneficial to make the understanding of the target location consistent between the terminal device and the access network device, prevent the terminal device from triggering an unnecessary registration update process, and avoid signaling waste.
  • the first information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold
  • the location of the terminal device, the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the third distance threshold may be the distance threshold A described in the specific implementation section below.
  • the first rule information can indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device or the access network device, that is, the first rule information can indicate that the decision subject Whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold is the terminal device or the access network device.
  • the first rule information is used to instruct the access network device to determine the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold as the target position.
  • the first rule information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold as the target position.
  • the first rule information can indicate the decision-making body that judges whether the location of the terminal device meets the first rule, that is, the core network device has determined that the terminal device or the access network device determines whether the terminal device meets the first rule before sending the first rule information. Whether the location of the device satisfies the first rule. Therefore, the core network device can clearly know the decision-making body for obtaining the target location (that is, the access network device decides whether the location of the terminal device meets the first rule, or whether the terminal device decides whether the first rule is satisfied), which is beneficial to the core network device
  • the value of the third distance threshold is adjusted based on different decision-making subjects. In addition, it is beneficial to reduce the implementation complexity of terminal equipment and access network equipment.
  • the first rule information may not indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device or the access network device. network equipment. That is to say, after the access network device receives the first rule information, it is determined based on factors such as the current network quality that the access network device is the subject of decision-making, that is, the access network device itself judges the current location of the terminal device and the first rule. Whether the distance between a reference location reaches the third distance threshold; or, the terminal device as the decision-making body, that is, sends the first rule information to the terminal device, and the terminal device judges the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the first reference position. Whether the distance between them reaches the third distance threshold.
  • the access network device can determine the decision-making body for obtaining the target location based on factors such as network quality, which is beneficial to improving the flexibility of the access network device to report the target location.
  • the access network device is used as the decision-making body for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule.
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate The position of the terminal device determined after the terminal device receives the first indication information is the target position.
  • the access network device can obtain the distance between the current position of the terminal device and the first reference position, and when the access network device determines the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position according to the first rule information When the distance between them reaches the third distance threshold, the access network device sends the second information to the terminal device.
  • the access network device determines whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold based on the first rule information, and the access network device can determine the position of the terminal device When the distance from the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold, the first indication information is sent to the terminal device. Therefore, the terminal device only needs to acquire the current position of the terminal device as the target position according to the first indication information, and does not require the terminal device to judge the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal equipment, and is also beneficial to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device is used as a decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule, and in this case, the second information includes the first rule information.
  • the access network device can send the first rule information to the terminal device, and when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold, the terminal device determines that the current position of the terminal device is the target position , and send the target location to the access network device. Since it is easier for a terminal device to determine its own location than an access network device, it is beneficial to improve the accuracy of the target location sent by the terminal device to the access network device, which in turn helps to improve the accuracy of the target location sent by the access network device to the access network device. The accuracy of the target location sent by the core network device.
  • the first information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device;
  • the second information includes the second rule information.
  • the access network device receives the positions of each terminal device from the terminal device, and determines each position of the terminal device received from the terminal device as a target position.
  • the core network device sends the second rule information to the access network device, so that the access network device knows that each location of the terminal device received from the terminal device is a target location.
  • the access network device sends the second rule information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can learn that the positions determined by the terminal device each time are target positions, and need to be sent to the access network device. It is beneficial to make the terminal device and the access network device have the same understanding of the target location.
  • the first information includes third rule information
  • the third rule information is used by the access network device to determine that the target location includes a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device The location of the terminal device obtained in .
  • the second information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the access network device sends the second information to the terminal device.
  • the core network device can know the geographic location of the terminal device before entering the unconnected state. It is beneficial for the core network device to more accurately determine the paging area of the terminal device when it needs to perform paging management on the terminal device, so as to reduce the signaling overhead caused by paging.
  • the core network device since the core network device will also update the registration area based on the first indication information indicating the target location, the terminal device will not return to the connected state within a short time after entering the unconnected state due to the need to trigger the registration update process. It is beneficial to avoid frequent switching of the terminal equipment between the connected state and the non-connected state, thereby helping to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the first location information is also used by the core network device to determine the second distance threshold, and the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold. Since the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold, the registration area determined based on the second distance threshold is larger than the registration area determined based on the first distance threshold. Therefore, the terminal device is not easy to trigger the registration update process, which is beneficial to reduce the number of terminal devices. The frequency of triggering the registration update process, extending the period for the terminal device to trigger the registration update process.
  • the first information further includes second indication information
  • the second information further includes the second indication information
  • the second indication information is also used to indicate the access stratum (access stratum, AS) sends the target location to the non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) of the terminal device.
  • the NAS of the terminal device can obtain the current position of the terminal device through a module capable of obtaining location information such as a global positioning system (GPS) or a global navigation satellite system (GNSS). Therefore, The AS of the terminal device will not actively send the location of the terminal device to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • the AS of the terminal device can send the obtained location information to the NAS of the terminal device based on the second indication information, instead of the NAS of the terminal device obtaining the location information of the terminal device, so that the AS of the terminal device has the ability to access
  • the ability of the network device to send the location information of the terminal device so that the target location obtained by the NAS of the terminal device from the AS of the terminal device is consistent with the target location obtained by the access network device from the AS of the terminal device, and thus makes the target location obtained by the core network device
  • the target position is consistent with the target position obtained by the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the access network device receives a first paging message from the core network device, the The first paging message includes the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold; then, the access network device sends a plurality of messages from the access network device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold A target cell and/or a target beam coverage area is determined in a cell; the access network device sends a second paging message for paging the terminal device to the target cell and/or the target beam coverage area.
  • the access network device may select one or more cells from the multiple cells as the target cell based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the target access network device may select a cell close to the second reference position as the target cell.
  • the target access network device may also select one or more beam coverage areas from one or more cells.
  • the target access network device may select a beam coverage area close to the second reference position as the target beam coverage area.
  • the access network device can filter out a target cell and/or a target beam coverage area from multiple cells based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold. Therefore, the access network device can page the terminal device within a small range, thereby reducing signaling overhead for paging, saving air interface resources, and improving system performance.
  • the present application provides a method for updating information, in this method, the terminal equipment receives information from the access network equipment The second information of the device, the second information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the second location information to the access network device; then, the terminal device sends the second location information to the access network device, and the terminal The device determines a trigger condition of a registration update process based on the second location information.
  • the second location information is used for the access network device to determine the first location information.
  • the terminal device may first send the second location information to the access network device, and then determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information; it may also first determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information, and then determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information, and then Sending the second location information to the access network device; the terminal device may also send the second location information to the access network device while determining the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information.
  • the terminal device may also send the second location information to the access network device while determining the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information.
  • the terminal device can determine the second location information based on the second information determined by the access network device, then send the second location information to the access network device and determine the registration update procedure based on the second location information Triggering conditions. Therefore, it is beneficial to make the understanding of the second location information consistent between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby helping to prevent the terminal device from triggering an unnecessary registration update process to report the location information, and saving signaling overhead.
  • the second location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the first reference location and the first distance threshold are parameters configured by the core network device for the terminal device to trigger a registration update process.
  • the core network device before the terminal device receives the second information from the access network device, the core network device has configured the foregoing first reference location and the first distance threshold for the terminal device. Therefore, when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the registration update process includes that the terminal device uses the current location of the terminal device to update the first reference location, and the terminal device sends the current location of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device, so that the core network device uses The current location of the terminal device updates the first reference location.
  • the terminal device can determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on determining the target location before triggering the registration update process, and based on the second location information indicating the target position. It can also be understood that the terminal device modifies the triggering condition of the registration update process before triggering the registration update process, so that the terminal device will no longer follow the original registration update parameters (that is, the first reference position and the first distance threshold ) triggers a registration update. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the frequency of triggering the registration update by the terminal device, and reduce the signaling overhead of the registration update.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the target position indicated by the second position information determined by the terminal device satisfies the feature that the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold. Because, according to the registration update rule configured by the core network device, when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the terminal device will trigger the registration update process. However, the distance between the target position determined in this embodiment and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold, that is, the condition for triggering the registration update process has not been met, and the terminal device will not trigger the registration update process. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the frequency of triggering the registration update by the terminal device, and save the signaling overhead caused by the registration update process.
  • the terminal device determines a trigger condition of the registration update process based on the second location information, including: the terminal device determines a second reference location based on the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger the Registration update process.
  • the second reference position is used to update the first reference position.
  • the terminal device directly uses the second reference position to replace the first reference position.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device can update the first reference location to the second reference location based on the target location indicated by the second location information, it can trigger a registration update based on the second reference location instead of based on the first reference location. Trigger a registration update. Since the second location information is determined by the terminal device before triggering the registration update process according to the original configuration of the first reference position and the first distance threshold, the period for the terminal device to trigger the registration update process can be extended, which is beneficial to reduce terminal The frequency at which the device triggers registration updates reduces signaling overhead.
  • the second information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the terminal device whose distance from the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold , the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the terminal device determines that the current position of the terminal device is the target position.
  • the access network device can send the first rule information to the terminal device, and when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold, the terminal device determines that the current position of the terminal device is the target position , and send the target location to the access network device. Since it is easier for a terminal device to determine its own location than an access network device, it is beneficial to improve the accuracy and timeliness of the target location sent by the terminal device to the access network device, thereby improving access The accuracy and timeliness of the target location sent by the network equipment to the core network equipment.
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device determined after receiving the first indication information as the target position.
  • the terminal device only obtains the current position of the terminal device as the target position according to the first indication information, and does not require the terminal device to judge the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position, nor does it require the terminal The device determines whether the end device needs to be released or suspended. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal equipment, and is also beneficial to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the access network device sends the aforementioned second rule information to the terminal device, which is beneficial for the terminal device to know that the access network device will determine the position that the terminal device will report to the access network device each time as The target location is conducive to making the terminal device and the access network device have the same understanding of the target location, and further helps the terminal device to avoid triggering unnecessary registration update procedures, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device determining the second reference position based on the target position includes: the AS of the terminal device sending the target position to the NAS of the terminal device; the NAS of the terminal device updating the target position based on the target position The first reference position is used to obtain the second reference position.
  • the AS of the terminal device may send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device based on the indication of the second indication information, or it may be stipulated by the protocol that the AS of the terminal device can receive the target location Send to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the second information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the present application provides an information update method, in which the core network equipment sends first information to the access network equipment that provides services for the terminal equipment, and the first information is used to indicate that the access network equipment Send the first location information of the terminal device to the core network device. Then, the core network device receives the first location information from the access network device. Then, the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the first location information.
  • the core network device can instruct the access network device to report the first location information to the core network device based on the first information, the core network device can obtain the terminal location information independently of the registration update process triggered by the terminal device.
  • Location information of the device for example, first location information. It is beneficial for the core network equipment to obtain the location information of the terminal equipment in a timely manner and use it to determine the paging area or registration area of the terminal equipment, improving the timeliness and accuracy of paging management and/or registration management of the terminal equipment.
  • the core network device can determine an appropriate registration area based on the first location information, so that the terminal device does not trigger a registration update within the registration area determined by the core network device. Signaling overhead due to location.
  • the core network equipment determines an appropriate paging area based on the first location information reported by the access network equipment, so as to reduce the signaling overhead of paging the terminal equipment on the network side (for example, access network equipment or core network equipment) , which also helps to reduce the signaling overhead of registration update.
  • the first location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the first reference location and the first distance threshold are configured parameters for triggering a registration update process.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined.
  • the core network device determines the second reference location and the second distance threshold based on the first location information, and then, the core network device determines the paging area and/or the terminal device based on the second reference location and the second distance threshold Register area.
  • the core network device may determine the second reference position only based on the target position, and it may also be understood that the core network device updates the first reference position based on the target position to obtain the second reference position; the core network device may also Determining the second reference position and the second distance threshold based on the target position can also be understood as that the core network device simultaneously updates the first reference position and the first distance threshold based on the target position to obtain the second reference position and the second distance threshold.
  • the first information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the terminal device whose distance from the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold , the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the first information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the first information includes third rule information
  • the third rule information is used by the access network device to determine that the target location includes a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device The location of the terminal device obtained in .
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the first information further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the core network device determining a target access network device for paging the terminal device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold; The device sends a first paging message to the target access network device, where the first paging message includes the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold are used to determine the first geographical area; Paging the target access network device of the terminal device includes: determining, by the core network device, an access network device located in the first geographical area as the target access network device.
  • the core network device determines the first geographic area based on the second reference location and the first distance threshold. For example, the core network device determines that a circular area with the second reference location as the center and the first distance threshold as the radius is the aforementioned first geographic area. For another example, the core network device determines that a rectangular area with the second reference position as the geometric center of the rectangle and with the first distance threshold as the geometric center to the side of the rectangle is the aforementioned first geographic area.
  • the core network device determines the second reference position and the second distance threshold based on the target position, that is, the core network device updates the first distance threshold to the second distance threshold and converts the first The reference location is updated to the second reference location, and at this time, the core network device determines the first geographic area based on the second reference location and the second distance threshold. For example, the core network device determines that a circular area with the second reference location as the center and the second distance threshold as the radius is the aforementioned first geographic area. For another example, the core network device determines that a rectangular area with the second reference position as the geometric center of the rectangle and with the second distance threshold as the geometric center to the side of the rectangle is the aforementioned first geographic area.
  • At least one of the second reference position and the second distance threshold and position change information are used to determine the second geographical area, and the position change information includes information indicating the moving direction of the terminal device. information and/or information indicating the moving speed of the terminal device; the core network device determines a target access network device for paging the terminal device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold, including: the The core network device determines that the access network device located in the second geographical area is the target access network device.
  • the target location is represented by geographic location information.
  • the method further includes: the core network device determines the tracking area code TAC corresponding to the first location information according to the first correspondence relationship and the first location information , wherein the first correspondence is a correspondence between a geographic area and a TAC.
  • the first location information may be represented by geographic location information, and the geographic location information may be latitude and longitude, administrative area or country area, and the like.
  • the geographic area may be represented by geographic location information such as latitude and longitude, administrative area, or country area.
  • geographic areas can also be represented by grids based on latitude and longitude. For example, a grid determined every 5° in longitude and every 5° in latitude.
  • the core network device can convert the target location represented by geographical location information such as longitude and latitude into TAC, so that some strategies implemented in the core network device based on TAC can be compared with the registration update mechanism based on reference location and distance threshold connect. It is beneficial to improve the compatibility between the registration update mechanism based on the reference position and the distance threshold and the TAC-based registration update mechanism in the traditional technology, so as to make the system run smoothly.
  • the present application provides an information update method, in which the access network device does not perceive the content of the message transmitted between the terminal device and the core network device, and the access network device only plays the role of transparent transmission.
  • the terminal device receives third information from the core network device through the access network device, and the third information is used to instruct the terminal device to send third location information to the core network device through the access network device; the terminal The device sends the third location information to the core network device through the access network device, and the terminal device determines a trigger condition of a registration update process based on the third location information.
  • the third location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the terminal device determines a trigger condition of the registration update process based on the third location information, including: the terminal device determines a second reference location based on the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger the Registration update process.
  • the third information includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the target location to the core network device through the access network device, and the target location includes The location determined by the terminal device within a preset time range before being released.
  • the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device within a preset time range before being released as the target position.
  • the core network device instructs the terminal device to report the location of the terminal device through the access network device before being released, which is beneficial for the core network device to know the location of the terminal device in a timely manner, and further facilitates the core network device to monitor the terminal device.
  • Register for zone management or paging zone management before the terminal device enters the non-connected state (for example, inactive state or idle state), the terminal device reports the current location of the terminal device as the target location to the core network device according to the third indication information, therefore, The core network device can know the geographic location of the terminal device before entering the disconnected state.
  • the core network device it is beneficial for the core network device to more accurately determine the paging area of the terminal device when it needs to perform paging management on the terminal device, so as to reduce the signaling overhead caused by paging.
  • the core network device since the core network device will also update the registration area based on the first indication information indicating the target location, the terminal device will not return to the connected state within a short time after entering the unconnected state due to the need to trigger the registration update process. It is beneficial to avoid frequent switching of the terminal equipment between the connected state and the non-connected state, thereby helping to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate to the terminal device that the position determined after receiving the fourth indication information is the target position.
  • the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device determined after receiving the fourth indication information as the target position.
  • the core network device can communicate with the NAS of the terminal device when the terminal device is in the connected state, the core network device can sense whether the terminal device is about to be released. In this embodiment, the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device as the target location only after receiving the fourth indication information, which is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal device.
  • the present application provides an information update method, in which the access network device does not perceive the content of the message transmitted between the terminal device and the core network device, and the access network device only plays the role of transparent transmission.
  • the core network The device sends third information to the terminal device through the access network device that provides services for the terminal device, and the third information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the third location of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device information;
  • the core network device receives the third location information from the terminal device through the access network device;
  • the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the third location information.
  • the third location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined.
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the third information includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the target location to the core network device through the access network device, and the target location includes The location determined by the terminal device within a preset time range before being released.
  • the core network device instructs the terminal device to report the location of the terminal device through the access network device before being released, which is beneficial for the core network device to know the location of the terminal device. It is beneficial for the core network equipment to perform registration area management or paging area management on the terminal equipment.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the location determined by the terminal device after receiving the fourth indication information is the target location;
  • the core network device Sending the third information to the terminal device through the access network device that provides services for the terminal device includes: when the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be released, the core network device sends the terminal device through the access network device Send the fourth indication information.
  • the core network device can communicate with the NAS of the terminal device when the terminal device is in the connected state, the core network device can sense whether the terminal device is about to be released. In this embodiment, the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device as the target location only after receiving the fourth indication information, which is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the access network device in the foregoing implementation manner, or may be a chip in the access network device.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be a transceiver;
  • the access network device may also include a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory; the storage module is used for Instructions are stored, and the processing module executes the instructions stored in the storage module, so that the access network device executes the first aspect or the method in any one implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.; the processing module executes the instructions stored in the storage module to Make the access network device execute the method in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the storage module may be a storage module in the chip (for example, a register, a cache, etc.), or a storage module in the access network device located outside the chip (for example, a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.) .
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be the terminal in the foregoing implementation manners.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be a transceiver;
  • the terminal device may also include a storage module, which may be a memory; the storage module is used to store instructions, the The processing module executes the instructions stored in the storage module, so that the terminal device executes the method in the second aspect or any implementation manner of the second aspect; or executes the fourth aspect or any implementation manner of the fourth aspect method in .
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.; the processing module executes the instructions stored in the storage module, so that the The terminal device executes the method in the second aspect or any implementation manner of the second aspect; or executes the fourth aspect or the method in any implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • the storage module may be a storage module in the chip (for example, a register, a cache, etc.), or a storage module in the terminal device located outside the chip (for example, a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.).
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the core network device in the foregoing implementation manner, or may be a chip in the core network device.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be a transceiver;
  • the core network device may also include a storage module, which may be a memory; the storage module is used to store instructions , the processing module executes the instruction stored in the storage module, so that the core network device executes the method in the third aspect or any one of the implementation manners of the third aspect; or, executes the fifth aspect or any one of the fifth aspect method in one embodiment.
  • the processing module may be a processor, and the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, a pin or a circuit, etc.; the processing module executes the instructions stored in the storage module, so that The core network device executes the third aspect or the method in any implementation manner of the third aspect; or executes the fifth aspect or the method in any implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
  • the storage module may be a storage module in the chip (for example, a register, a cache, etc.), or a storage module in the core network device located outside the chip (for example, a read-only memory, a random access memory, etc.).
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be an integrated circuit chip.
  • the integrated circuit chip includes a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with a memory, and the memory is used to store a program or an instruction, and when the program or instruction is executed by the processor, the communication device executes the method described in any one of the implementation manners of the foregoing aspects.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method described in any one of the implementation manners of the foregoing aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the instructions are run on a computer, so that the computer executes the method described in any one of the above aspects .
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication system
  • the communication system includes the access network device implementing the aforementioned first aspect and any implementation manner of the first aspect, and implementing the aforementioned second aspect and the second aspect
  • the terminal device in any implementation manner of the aspect, and the core network device in any implementation manner of the aforementioned third aspect and the third aspect.
  • the communication system includes the terminal device implementing the fourth aspect and any implementation manner of the fourth aspect; and the core network device implementing the fifth aspect and any implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
  • FIG. 1A is a network architecture diagram applicable to the information update method proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 1B is another network architecture diagram applicable to the information update method proposed in this application.
  • FIG. 1C is another network architecture diagram applicable to the information update method proposed in this application.
  • Fig. 2 is a flowchart of the information updating method in the present application
  • FIG. 3A is an example diagram of a scene triggering a registration update process in the traditional technology
  • FIG. 3B is an example diagram of a scene triggering the registration update process in this application.
  • Fig. 4 is another flowchart of the information updating method in the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is another flowchart of the information updating method in the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is another flowchart of the information updating method in the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is another flowchart of the information updating method in the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is another flowchart of the information updating method in the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is a flowchart of the paging method in the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a method for processing movement restriction information in the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a communication device in the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication device in the present application.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication device in the present application.
  • the information update method proposed in this application can be applied to 5G NR (5G New Radio) system, the 6th generation mobile communication technology (6G) system and subsequent evolution systems, and this application does not limit it.
  • the communication system at least includes terminal equipment, access network equipment and core network equipment.
  • the terminal device includes a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user.
  • a handheld device with wireless connectivity or a processing device connected to a wireless modem may be included.
  • the terminal device may communicate with a core network (for example, a 5G core network (5th generation core, 5GC)) via a radio access network (radio access network, RAN), and may exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • a core network for example, a 5G core network (5th generation core, 5GC)
  • radio access network radio access network
  • the terminal device may also be called a terminal (Terminal), user equipment (user equipment, UE), wireless terminal device, mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT) device, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), Mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile station (mobile), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal equipment (remote terminal), access terminal equipment (access terminal), user Terminal equipment (user terminal), with User agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • the terminal device may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) terminal device, an industrial control Wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety ), a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, and the like.
  • the terminal device in this application may be any one of the above-mentioned devices or chips, which is not specifically limited here. Regardless of being a device or a chip, the terminal device can be manufactured, sold or used as an independent product. In this embodiment and subsequent embodiments, a terminal device is used as an example for introduction.
  • the access network device can be any kind of device with wireless transceiver function, and can be used to be responsible for functions related to the air interface, for example, wireless link maintenance function, radio resource management function, and some mobility management functions.
  • the access network device may also be configured with a base band unit (BBU), which has a base band signal processing function.
  • BBU base band unit
  • the access network device may be an access network device (radio access network, RAN) currently providing services for the terminal device.
  • Node B Node B
  • evolved Node B evolved Node B
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • next-generation Node B next generation node B
  • nodes in the 6G system for example, xNodeB
  • transmission reception point transmission reception point, TRP
  • radio network controller radio network controller
  • base station controller base station controller, BSC
  • base transceiver station base transceiver station, BTS
  • home base station for example, home evolved node (home evolved NodeB) or home node (home Node B, HNB)
  • home base station for example, home evolved node (home evolved NodeB) or home node (home Node B, HNB)
  • the access network equipment may include a centralized unit (CU) (also known as control unit) and/or distributed unit (DU) devices.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the RAN equipment including CU and DU separates the protocol layer of gNB in the NR system, the functions of some protocol layers are placed in the CU for centralized control, and the remaining part or all of the functions of the protocol layer are distributed in the DU and controlled by the CU. du.
  • the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be any one of the above-mentioned devices or a chip in the above-mentioned devices, which is not specifically limited here. Regardless of whether it is a device or a chip, the access network device can be manufactured, sold or used as an independent product. In this embodiment and subsequent embodiments, an access network device is used as an example for introduction.
  • a core network device refers to a device in a core network (core network, CN) that provides service support for a terminal device.
  • core network CN
  • core network equipment Currently, some common examples of core network equipment are: access and mobility management function (AMF) entity, session management function (SMF) entity, user plane function (UPF) entity ) entities and so on, which are not listed here.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • the AMF entity can be responsible for access management and mobility management of terminal equipment
  • the SMF entity can be responsible for session management, such as user session establishment
  • the UPF entity can be a functional entity of the user plane, mainly responsible for connecting to external networks.
  • entities may also be referred to as network elements or functional entities.
  • an AMF entity may also be called an AMF network element or an AMF functional entity; and for another example, an SMF entity may also be called an SMF network element or an SMF functional entity.
  • the core network equipment in this application includes at least the AMF entity.
  • the information update method proposed in this application can be applied to a non-terrestrial network (non-terrestrial network, NTN) architecture.
  • NTN non-terrestrial network
  • some or all of the functions of the foregoing access network equipment may be implemented through satellites.
  • the ground base station for example, the ground gNB
  • the satellite is used as the remote radio unit (remote radio unit, RRU) (also known as L1 relay or L1 relay), with wireless frequency conversion (frequency conversion) Functions such as frequency amplification and frequency amplification are used to realize relay transparent transmission
  • the NTN gateway is used to forward signals from satellites or signals from access network equipment.
  • terminal devices send NR Uu wireless interface signals to access network devices through satellite relay transparent transmission and NTN gateway forwarding.
  • the ground access network equipment After the ground access network equipment receives the signal, it communicates with the ground core network equipment according to the land network technology in the traditional technology. Similarly, when the core network equipment sends signals to the terminal equipment, the base station on the ground (for example, the gNB on the ground) also serves as the access network equipment, and the satellite is also used to realize signal relay and transparent transmission. The details are similar to the aforementioned process, and will not be repeated here.
  • the satellite is used as an access network device for regenerating signals received from the ground.
  • the ground terminal equipment sends NR Uu wireless interface signals to the access network equipment (that is, the satellite) through the service link (service link) with the satellite.
  • the satellite receives NR Uu wireless interface signals from terminal equipment, and parses and processes the received signals into NG interface signals. Then, the satellite sends the signal to the NTN gateway on the ground through the satellite wireless interface (satelliteradio interface, SRI) on the feeder link (feeder link), so that the NTN gateway on the ground forwards the signal to the core network equipment on the ground.
  • SRI satelliteradio interface
  • the satellite is also used to realize the function of the access network equipment. The details are similar to the aforementioned process, and will not be repeated here.
  • the satellite serves as the DU of the access network equipment
  • the ground base station for example, gNB-CU
  • the ground terminal equipment sends the NR Uu wireless interface signal to the DU of the access network equipment (that is, the satellite) through the service link (service link) with the satellite.
  • the DU (that is, the satellite) of the access network equipment receives and analyzes the NR-Uu radio interface signal from the terminal equipment to form an F1 radio interface signal.
  • the DU of the access network equipment is sent to the NTN gateway on the ground through the satellite radio interface (SRI) on the feeder link, so that the NTN gateway on the ground forwards the signal to the access network on the ground.
  • CU of the network device After receiving the signal, the CU of the access network equipment on the ground communicates with the core network equipment on the ground according to the land network technology in the traditional technology.
  • the core network equipment sends signals to the terminal equipment
  • the satellite also serves as the DU of the access network equipment
  • the ground base station also serves as the CU of the access network equipment.
  • the terrestrial base station in the examples shown in FIG. 1A, FIG. 1B and FIG. 1C may also be implemented using base stations of other network standards, for example, evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB) , a node (for example, xNodeB) in the 6G system, etc., which are not limited here.
  • evolved Node B evolved Node B
  • a node for example, xNodeB
  • 6G system 6G system
  • the registration update mechanism defines a reference location and a distance threshold, and requires that when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the reference location reaches the distance threshold, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the NAS of the terminal device obtains the location information of the terminal device, and passes The registration request (Registration Request) message sends the location information of the terminal device to the access network device (for example, the ground base station in FIG. 1A , the satellite in FIG. 1B , and the satellite and ground base station in FIG. 1C ).
  • the access network device After receiving the registration request message, the access network device only transparently transmits the registration request message to the core network device without perceiving the content of the registration request message.
  • This mechanism requires the terminal device to report the location information of the terminal device to the core network device through a specific message (for example, a registration request message), so that the information of the terminal device reported by the terminal device to the access network device based on other factors can only be used for
  • the access network device performs other processing and cannot report to the core network device through the access network device.
  • the terminal device may need to wait until the distance between the terminal device's location and the reference location reaches the aforementioned distance threshold before initiating a registration update process and reporting the location of the terminal device to the core network device.
  • the above-mentioned mechanism may cause the core network device to fail to obtain the location of the terminal device in time, and the terminal device also needs to trigger an unnecessary registration update process to report the location to the core network device.
  • the messages in the registration update process (for example, registration request messages) not only carry the location information of the terminal device but also need to carry other information, resulting in increased signaling overhead.
  • this application proposes an information update method, which can enable access network equipment to participate in determining the location of the terminal equipment reported to the core network equipment under the condition of using the registration update mechanism based on the reference location and distance threshold instead of Only the location reported by the terminal device is transparently transmitted. Not only can the core network equipment obtain the location of the terminal equipment in time based on its own needs, but it can also enable the core network equipment to perform registration area management and/or paging area management based on the location of the terminal equipment reported by the access network equipment.
  • the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment involved in this method can be applied to the NTN shown in any one of the examples in FIG. 1A , FIG. 1B and FIG. 1C .
  • the core network device, the access network device and the terminal device will Perform the following steps.
  • Step 201 the core network device sends first information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the first information from the core network device.
  • the first information is used to instruct the access network device to send the first location information of the terminal device to the core network device
  • the first location information is used to instruct the access network device to report the target location of the terminal device to the core network device.
  • the first information may be rule information, which is used to determine a rule for the access network device to report the first location information to the core network device. That is to say, after the access network device receives the aforementioned first information, the access network device can determine how to obtain the aforementioned target location based on the first information, and how to report the first location information indicating the aforementioned target location to The core network equipment.
  • the first location information may be represented by geographic location information, that is, the geographic location information is used to indicate the target location.
  • the geographic location information may be latitude and longitude, country area, administrative area or street address, etc., or may be a grid divided based on latitude and longitude. For example, a grid determined every 5° in longitude and every 5° in latitude.
  • the first location information is used by the core network device to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device.
  • the paging area refers to the area used by the core network equipment for paging the terminal equipment. There may be one or more access network devices in the paging area.
  • the core network device may page the foregoing terminal device through the access network device in the paging area.
  • the registration area refers to the area where the terminal device is registered in the core network. When the terminal device leaves the registration area, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the paging area and the registration area may be the same area.
  • the paging zone is associated with the registration zone It can be different areas, for example, the paging area includes the registration area and is larger than the registration area.
  • the foregoing target location is a location determined by the terminal device through the second information, and the location is used by the terminal device to determine a trigger condition of the registration update process.
  • the introduction of the processing procedure for the terminal device to determine the target location by using the second information please refer to step 203 below.
  • the introduction of the processing procedure for the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the target location please refer to step 204 below.
  • the target location may be the geographic location of the terminal device obtained by the terminal device within a specific time range, or may be the current geographic location of the terminal device when the terminal device moves to a certain spatial range.
  • the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold. It can be understood that the target location is the location of the terminal device before a specific time, and the specific time is the time when the registration update process is triggered. That is to say, the target location is the location of the terminal device before the specific moment when the terminal device triggers the registration update process based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the first reference location and the first distance threshold are parameters configured by the core network device for the terminal device to trigger a registration update process.
  • the core network device may send registration update rule information to the terminal device through the access network device, and the registration update rule information includes parameters used to trigger a registration update process (for example, , the first reference position and the first distance threshold, etc.).
  • the terminal device will trigger a registration update process based on the foregoing first reference location and the first distance threshold when the trigger condition is met. Specifically, when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches a first distance threshold, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the area determined by the reference position (for example, the first reference position) and the distance threshold (for example, the first distance threshold) involved in this application can be understood as a circle, for example, with the reference position as the center and the distance
  • the threshold is a circle with a radius; it can also be a rectangle, for example, a rectangle with the reference position as the geometric center of the rectangle and the distance from the geometric center to the sides of the rectangle with the threshold; it can also be an area of other shapes.
  • the area determined by the reference position and the distance threshold is a circle as an example.
  • the registration update rule configured by the core network device for the terminal device includes a first reference position (namely point O) and a first distance threshold (R1).
  • a first reference position namely point O
  • R1 ie the first distance threshold
  • the terminal device does not trigger the registration update process.
  • the terminal device moves to the boundary of the aforementioned circular area or just moves out of the circular area (for example, the terminal device moves from point A to point B in FIG. 3A )
  • the terminal device will trigger a registration update process at point B.
  • the terminal device sends the position of point B to the core network device through the access network device, and the terminal device updates the first reference position according to the position of point B, that is, the first reference position is updated from point O to point B point. Then, the terminal device will use point B as the new first reference position to calculate whether the distance between the current position of the terminal device and the new first reference position reaches the first distance threshold, and when the first distance threshold is reached, Trigger the registration update process. Cycle like this.
  • the distance between the target position of the terminal device and the first reference position is smaller than the aforementioned first distance threshold.
  • the target location is a location in a specific area, and the specific area is an area determined by configured parameters for triggering a registration update process.
  • the area determined by the first reference position and the first distance threshold is the area of the terminal device located in the area determined by the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the aforementioned first distance threshold, that is, the target position Located within the area determined according to the first reference position and the first distance threshold. That is to say, the location of the terminal device that the core network device requires the access network device to report through the first information is the location where the terminal device is located in the area determined by the first reference position and the first distance threshold.
  • the registration update process was not triggered. Therefore, it is beneficial to save the signaling overhead caused by triggering the registration update procedure.
  • the target location may be as described in any one of the above implementation manners, and may also satisfy the descriptions of the foregoing two implementation manners at the same time. Specifically, there is no limitation here.
  • the first information includes first rule information, and the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the terminal device when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location reaches a distance threshold A. Location. It can also be understood that the first rule information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches the distance threshold A is determined as the target position.
  • the first rule information includes a distance threshold A, and the distance threshold A is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the first rule information can indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device or the access network device, that is, the first rule information can indicate that the location of the terminal device is determined to be consistent with the first rule.
  • the device whose distance between the first reference positions reaches the distance threshold A is a terminal device or an access network device.
  • the first rule information is used to indicate that when the distance between the access network device and the first reference position reaches the distance threshold A
  • the location of the terminal device is the target location.
  • the first rule information is used to indicate that when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the distance threshold A
  • the location of the terminal device is the target location.
  • Example 1 before the core network device sends the first rule information, the terminal device or the access network device determines whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule. Therefore, the core network device can clearly know the decision-making body for obtaining the target location (that is, the access network device decides whether the location of the terminal device meets the first rule, or whether the terminal device decides whether the first rule is satisfied), which is beneficial to the core network device Adjust the value of the distance threshold A based on different decision-making subjects. In addition, it is beneficial to reduce the implementation complexity of terminal equipment and access network equipment.
  • the first rule information may not indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device or the access network device, but is handed over to the access network device for implementation.
  • the access network device determines based on the current network quality and other factors that the access network device makes the decision The subject, that is, the access network device judges whether the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the distance threshold A.
  • Example 2.2 the access network device decides that the terminal device should be the subject of decision-making, and sends the first rule information to the terminal device, and the terminal device judges Whether the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the distance threshold A.
  • the access network device can determine the decision-making body for obtaining the target location based on factors such as network quality, which is beneficial to improving the flexibility and accuracy of the access network device reporting the target location to the core network.
  • the first information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes Each location of the terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device. It can also be understood that the second rule information is used to indicate that each location received by the access network device from the terminal device is a target location.
  • the access network device will report the received location of the terminal device as the target location to the core network equipment.
  • the access network device not only decides whether to perform handover based on the location of the terminal device, but also sends the terminal The location of the device.
  • the access network device can request the terminal device to report the location of the terminal device to the access network device based on its own beamforming optimization needs, and then the access network device can send the acquired location of the terminal device to the core network device .
  • the access network device may instruct the terminal device to report the location of the terminal device, and then convert the location of the terminal device into a tracking area identity (TAI) and report the TAI to the core network device (for example, AMF entity), so as to facilitate the access management of core network devices (for example, AMF entities). Report the location of the terminal device.
  • TAI tracking area identity
  • the access network device can use each location of the terminal device as a target location according to the second rule information, and use the The target location is sent to the core network device.
  • the first information includes third rule information
  • the third rule information is used for the access network device to determine that the target location includes the target location acquired within a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device.
  • the location of the end device It can also be understood that the third rule information is used to instruct the access network device to determine that the location of the terminal device obtained within a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device is the target location.
  • released (released) refers to a terminal device entering an idle (idle) state from a connected (connected) state
  • suspended (suspend) refers to a terminal device entering an inactive (inactive) state from a connected state.
  • the first information in this embodiment may include the rule information introduced in any one or more of the foregoing implementation manners, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first information further includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to update the first reference position based on the target position.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process according to the target location.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to use the target location as a trigger condition for the registration update process.
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • Step 202 the access network device sends the second information to the terminal device according to the first information; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second information from the access network device.
  • the second information is used to instruct the terminal device to send second location information to the access network device, and the second location information is used to indicate the target location reported by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the second information may be rule information, which is used to determine a rule for the terminal device to report the second location information to the access network device. That is to say, after the terminal device receives the aforementioned second information, the terminal device can determine how to obtain the aforementioned target location based on the second information, and how to report the second location information indicating the aforementioned target location to the access network. equipment.
  • the second information is indication information, which is used to instruct the terminal device to report the current location of the terminal device to the access network device, and to indicate that the current location of the terminal device reported by the terminal device is the target location.
  • the second location information is used to determine the first location information. Specifically, please refer to step 206 for a specific implementation manner of determining the first location information based on the second location information.
  • the second information is determined by the access network device based on the first information.
  • the second information may contain part or all of the first information, and the second information may also be different from the first information.
  • the rules indicated by the first information are different, and the content of the second information determined by the access network device is also different.
  • the first information includes the aforementioned first rule information
  • the first rule information can indicate that the decision-making body for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the access network device (for details, please refer to the preceding steps Example 1.1 of Way 1 in 201), or, the access network device determines whether the access network device judges whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule (for details, please refer to Example 2.1 of Way 1 in Step 201 above).
  • the second information determined by the access network device according to the first rule information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal equipment receives the first indication information.
  • the location is the target location.
  • the position of the terminal device determined after the terminal device receives the first indication information may be the first position determined after the terminal device receives the first indication information, or it may be the first position determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information. The location of the terminal device when the message was indicated.
  • the access network device can obtain the location of the terminal device. As the terminal device moves, the access network device may obtain one or more locations reported by the terminal device. After each time the access network device receives the location of a terminal device, the access network device judges whether the distance between the currently received location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the distance threshold A according to the first rule information.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the access network device determines that the distance between the currently received position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the distance threshold A, the access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device to indicate that the terminal device is receiving The position of the terminal device determined after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the terminal device only acquires the current location of the terminal device as the target location according to the first indication information, and does not require the terminal device to judge the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal equipment, and is also beneficial to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the first information is implemented using the first method in step 201, that is, the first information includes the aforementioned first rule information, and the first rule information can indicate whether the position of the terminal device satisfies the first rule.
  • the decision-making body of the terminal device is the terminal device (for details, please refer to the example 1.2 of the first method in the foregoing step 201), or the access network device determines whether the terminal device judges whether the location of the terminal device meets the first rule (for details, please refer to the foregoing step 201 Example 2.2 of Method 1).
  • the second information determined by the access network device according to the first rule information includes the aforementioned first rule information.
  • the terminal device determines whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the distance threshold A based on the first rule information, and the terminal device determines the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position When the distance threshold A is reached, the position of the terminal device is the target position.
  • the content and/or form of the first rule information in the second information may not be exactly the same as the first rule information in the first information, and the specific implementation form of the first rule information is not limited here.
  • the access network device may re-determine the first rule information in the second information based on the first rule information in the first information.
  • the access network device directly sends the first rule information in the received first information to the terminal device as the first rule information in the second information.
  • the first information is implemented using the second method in step 201, that is, the first information includes the foregoing second rule information.
  • the second information determined by the access network device according to the second rule information includes the aforementioned second rule information.
  • the content and/or form of the second rule information in the second information may not be exactly the same as the second rule information in the first information, and the specific implementation form of the second rule information is not limited here.
  • the access network device may re-determine the second rule information in the second information based on the second rule information in the first information.
  • the access network device directly sends the second rule information in the received first information to the terminal device as the second rule information in the second information.
  • the core network device sends the second rule information to the access network device, so that the access network device knows that each location of the terminal device received from the terminal device is a target location.
  • the access network device sends the second rule information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can learn that the positions determined by the terminal device each time are target positions, and need to be sent to the access network device. It is beneficial to make the understanding of the target location consistent between the terminal device and the access network device, and avoid inconsistency between the target location used by the terminal device to update the first reference location and the target location reported to the core network device by the access network device.
  • the first information is implemented using the third method in step 201, that is, the first information includes the aforementioned third rule information.
  • the second information determined by the access network device according to the third rule information includes the aforementioned first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is determined after receiving the first indication information.
  • the position of is the target position.
  • the position of the terminal device determined after the terminal device receives the first indication information may be the first position determined after the terminal device receives the first indication information, or it may be the first position determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information. The location of the terminal device when the information is indicated.
  • the access network device can receive service data from the terminal device. If the access network device has not received service data from the terminal device within a certain period of time, the access network device may determine that the terminal device is about to leave the connected state and enter a non-connected state (for example, an idle state or an inactive state). state), that is, the access network device determines that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended. Then, the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, so as to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • a non-connected state for example, an idle state or an inactive state. state
  • the terminal device can obtain the current location of the terminal device as the target location according to the first indication information before entering the non-connected state (for example, the inactive state or the idle state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the terminal device from re-entering the connected state due to the need to trigger a registration update process within a short period of time after entering the disconnected state, which is not only beneficial to save signaling overhead, but also helps to save power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the non-connected state for example, the inactive state or the idle state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the terminal device from re-entering the connected state due to the need to trigger a registration update process within a short period of time after entering the disconnected state, which is not only beneficial to save signaling overhead, but also helps to save power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information in this embodiment and the first indication information in the foregoing embodiments may be the same indication information, or may be different indication information (for example, there are differences in content and form but the same function), It is not limited here.
  • the terminal device receives the aforementioned first indication information, the terminal device does not perceive the target location determined by the access network device based on any rule, and the terminal device can determine that the access network device is connected to the access network after receiving the first indication information.
  • the location of the terminal device reported by the network device is the target location.
  • the second information determined by the access network device is determined by the implementation manner of the foregoing first information.
  • the first information in this embodiment includes the rule information introduced in the foregoing two or more implementation manners
  • the second information also includes multiple implementation manners, and each implementation manner corresponds to the foregoing first information. Specifically, there is no limitation here.
  • the second information when the first information includes the second indication information, the second information also includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to update the first reference position based on the target position. It can also be understood that the second indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process according to the target location. Specifically, the terminal device determines the triggering condition of the registration update process according to the target location for a specific implementation manner, please refer to the introduction in step 204 below.
  • the access network device sends the second information to the AS of the terminal device, and accordingly, the AS of the terminal device receives the aforementioned second information from the access network device.
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • Step 203 the terminal device determines the target location based on the second information.
  • the manner in which the terminal device determines the target location based on the second information is also different.
  • the second information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the terminal device when the distance from the first reference location reaches a distance threshold A.
  • the distance threshold A is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the terminal device can judge the distance between the current position of the terminal device and the first reference position based on the first rule information.
  • the terminal device determines that the current position of the terminal device is the target position.
  • the registration update rule configured by the core network device for the terminal device includes the first reference position (that is, point O) and the first distance threshold (R1), and the access network device sends to the terminal device
  • the first rule information includes a distance threshold A(R2).
  • the terminal device moves within a circular area with point O (i.e. the first reference position) as the center R1 (i.e. the first distance threshold) as the radius, the terminal device does not trigger the registration update process, and, when the terminal device When moving within a circular area with the point O (ie the first reference position) as the center R2 (ie the distance threshold A) as the radius, the terminal device does not need to determine the target position.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device moves to the boundary of a circular area with point O as the center and R2 as the radius or just moves out of the circular area (for example, the terminal device moves from point A to point C in Figure 3B), the terminal device will The position where point C is determined is the target position. It can be seen from FIG. 3B that point C is located in a circular area with point O as the center and R1 as the radius.
  • the terminal device determines the current location of the terminal device as the target location according to the first rule information. Since it is easier for a terminal device to determine its own location than an access network device, it is beneficial to improve the accuracy and timeliness of the target location sent by the terminal device to the access network device, thereby improving access The accuracy and timeliness of the target location sent by the network equipment to the core network equipment.
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position .
  • the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device determined after receiving the first indication information as the target position.
  • the terminal device can obtain location information through a module such as a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS) or a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GNSS). Obtain the current location of the terminal device, and determine the current location of the terminal device as the target location.
  • a module such as a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS) or a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GNSS).
  • the first indication information in this embodiment may be triggered by the access network device based on the first rule information, that is, the access network device determines the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location according to the first rule information.
  • the aforementioned first indication information sent to the terminal device when the distance reaches the distance threshold A; the aforementioned first indication information may also be based on the Triggered by the third rule information, that is, the access network device sends the aforementioned first indication information to the terminal device when it determines that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended according to the third rule information.
  • the access network device sends the aforementioned first indication information to the terminal device when it determines that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended according to the third rule information.
  • the terminal device only obtains the current position of the terminal device as the target position according to the first indication information, and does not require the terminal device to judge the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position, nor does it require the terminal Device determines whether to be released or suspended. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal equipment, and is also beneficial to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second information includes second rule information, and the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes each location of the terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device .
  • the terminal device may have been configured with configuration information for determining the location of the terminal device, for example, a handover-based measurement configuration and the like. No matter whether the terminal device receives the aforementioned second rule information, the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device based on the configured configuration information for determining the position of the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the aforementioned second rule information, the terminal device determines each determined location as a target location, and sends each of the aforementioned target locations to the access network device.
  • the network side will configure a variety of configuration information for determining the location of the terminal device for the terminal device, and the frequency with which the terminal device obtains the location of the terminal device is higher than the frequency with which the terminal device triggers a registration update degree. Therefore, the terminal device can always determine one or more positions as target positions within the circular area with the point O as the center and R1 as the radius shown in FIG. 3B .
  • the access network device sends the aforementioned second rule information to the terminal device, which is beneficial for the terminal device to know that the access network device will determine the position that the terminal device will report to the access network device each time as The target location is conducive to making the terminal device and the access network device have the same understanding of the target location, and further helps the terminal device to avoid triggering unnecessary registration update procedures, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device may generate the target location based on the second information introduced in any one of the foregoing implementation manners, or may simultaneously generate the target location based on the second information introduced in the foregoing various implementation manners. Specifically, There is no limit.
  • the AS of the terminal device will determine the target location of the terminal device through any one or more of the foregoing implementation manners, rather than the NAS of the terminal device obtaining the location of the terminal device. It is beneficial for the access network device receiving the target location from the AS of the terminal device to perceive the target location, so that the access network device can determine a more accurate target location and report it to the core network device.
  • Step 204 the terminal device determines the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the target location.
  • the trigger condition of the registration update process can be understood as a parameter triggering the registration update process reaches a certain value, and when a certain indicator of the terminal device reaches the value of the aforementioned parameter, the terminal device triggers the registration update process.
  • the terminal device determines a second reference location based on the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger a registration update process.
  • the terminal device triggers a registration update process based on the first reference position and the first distance threshold, that is, when the current position of the terminal device is between the first reference position If the distance between them reaches the aforementioned first distance threshold, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines the second reference position based on the target position, if the terminal device does not determine other distance thresholds, the terminal device triggers a registration update process based on the second reference position and the first distance threshold, that is, when the terminal device is currently If the distance between the location of the terminal device and the second reference location reaches the aforementioned first distance threshold, the terminal device triggers a registration update process.
  • the terminal device since The parameter triggering the registration update process is changed from the first reference location to the second reference location. Therefore, it can also be understood that the terminal device updates the first reference location based on the target location to obtain the second reference location.
  • the terminal device directly adopts the target position as the second reference position.
  • the AS of the terminal device sends a target location to the NAS of the terminal device, and then the NAS of the terminal device updates the first reference location based on the target location to obtain the second reference location.
  • the AS of the terminal device may send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device based on the indication of the second indication information, or it may be stipulated by the protocol that the AS of the terminal device sends the received target location to NAS for this terminal device.
  • the NAS of the terminal device uses the target position to replace the first reference position configured by the core network, and the obtained second reference position is the target position. Thereafter, the NAS of the terminal device will use the second reference location and the first distance threshold as parameters for triggering the registration update procedure. That is to say, after the NAS of the terminal device determines that the distance between the location of the terminal device and the second reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the NAS of the terminal device will not trigger the registration update process.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device moves to the boundary of a circular area with point O as the center and R2 as the radius or just moves out of the circular area (for example, the terminal device moves from point A in Figure 3B When moving to point C), the terminal device will determine the location of point C as the target position. Then, the terminal device uses the position of point C to update the first reference position to obtain a second reference position, that is, point C is determined as the second reference position. Afterwards, when the terminal device determines whether to trigger the registration update procedure, the terminal device will determine based on whether the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the location of point C (ie, the second reference location) reaches the first distance threshold. As shown in FIG.
  • the terminal device when the first distance threshold remains unchanged, the terminal device needs to at least move from point C to point D before triggering the registration update process. That is to say, using the scheme introduced in this embodiment mode, if the terminal device moves from point A to point D within the distance, the terminal device will not trigger the registration update process; and if the registration update mechanism of the traditional technology is used, the terminal device The registration update process is triggered when the device moves from point A to point B. It can be seen that the solution provided by the present application prolongs the time period between the terminal device triggering the registration update process, reduces the frequency of the terminal device triggering the registration update process, and thus saves the signaling overhead caused by triggering the registration update process.
  • the triggering condition of the registration update process may also include other information.
  • Step 205 the terminal device sends the second location information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the second location information from the terminal device.
  • the second location information is used to indicate the target location determined by the terminal device based on the second information.
  • the second location information may include one or more target locations.
  • the AS of the terminal device sends the foregoing second location information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the second location information from the AS of the terminal device.
  • the access network device can perceive the information received from the AS of the terminal device content, so that the access network equipment can determine a more accurate target location and report it to the core network equipment.
  • step 204 and step 205 are not limited to a specific time sequence. That is to say, the terminal device may first perform step 204 and then perform step 205, or may first perform step 205 and then perform step 204, or may perform step 204 and step 205 at the same time.
  • the specific embodiment is not limited.
  • Step 206 the access network device determines the first location information based on the second location information.
  • the second location information is the information received by the access network device from the terminal device for indicating the target location;
  • the first location information is the information for indicating the target location that the access network device needs to send to the core network device.
  • the access network device directly uses the second location information as the first location information, that is, the first location information determined by the access network device and the second location information received by the access network device same.
  • the format, content, and accuracy of the second location information and the first location information are not exactly the same, but both are used to indicate the target location.
  • the precision can be understood as the precision of the unit describing the target position.
  • the accuracy of the second location information may be meters, and the accuracy of the first location information may be kilometers.
  • Step 207 the access network device sends the first location information to the core network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the first location information from the access network device.
  • the first location information is used to indicate the target location determined by the access network device based on the second location information.
  • the first location information may indicate one or more target locations of the terminal device.
  • the target position indicated by the first position information is the same as the target position indicated by the second position information.
  • Step 208 the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the first location information.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is located in the registration area, the terminal device does not trigger the registration update process; when the terminal device leaves the registration area (for example, the terminal device crosses the border of the registration area), the terminal device triggers registration Update process.
  • the core network device determines a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold based on the target location indicated by the first location information, and the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold are used to trigger the registration update process .
  • the core network device may determine the second reference position only based on the target position, and it may also be understood that the core network device updates the first reference position based on the target position to obtain the second reference position; the core network device may also Determining the second reference position and the second distance threshold based on the target position can also be understood as that the core network device simultaneously updates the first reference position and the first distance threshold based on the target position to obtain the second reference position and the second distance threshold.
  • the core network device only determines the second reference position based on the target position, and does not determine other distance thresholds (for example, the second distance threshold) except the first distance threshold.
  • the core network device uses the target position as a second reference position, and the second reference position is used to replace the first reference position stored in the core network.
  • the registration area of the terminal device may be an area determined by the second reference position and the first distance threshold.
  • the registration area of the terminal device is a circular area with the second reference position as the center and the first distance threshold as the radius; for another example, the registration area of the terminal device is the geometric center of the rectangle with the second reference position as the center and the radius of the first distance threshold as The first distance threshold is a rectangle from the aforementioned geometric center to a side of the rectangle. This application does not limit the specific shape of the registration area.
  • the core network device can determine the current location of the terminal device, that is, the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the second reference location reaches the first distance threshold.
  • the core network device simultaneously determines the second reference location and the second distance threshold based on the target location. Specifically, in addition to using the target location as the second reference location, the core network device also determines the second distance threshold based on the frequency of received target locations. Exemplarily, if the number of target locations received by the core network device within a preset time period reaches a preset number (wherein, the preset time length and the preset number can be based on network quality, etc. factors), it means that the first distance threshold is set relatively small, and the core network device may update the first distance threshold to a second distance threshold, and the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the registration area of the terminal device may be an area determined by the second reference position and the second distance threshold.
  • the registration area of the terminal device is a circular area with the second reference position as the center and the second distance threshold as the radius; for another example, the registration area of the terminal device is the geometric center of the rectangle with the second reference position as the center and the second distance threshold as the radius.
  • the second distance threshold is a rectangle from the aforementioned geometric center to a side of the rectangle. This application does not limit the specific shape of the registration area.
  • the core network device determines the second distance threshold based on the TAC list.
  • the TAC list is determined by the access network device according to the beam identification information and sent to the core network device, wherein the beam identification information is used to indicate the beam used by the terminal device for communication, and the beam identification information may be a synchronization signal block identification (synchronization signal block identifier, SSB ID).
  • the TAC list may be included in the user location information (User Location Information) sent by the access network device to the core network device, or may be included in other information sent by the access network device to the core network device. No restrictions.
  • the method for the access network device to obtain the beam identification information includes that the terminal device determines the target position and sends the identification information of the beam covering the target position to the access network device, or the terminal device sends the access network The device sends the identification information of the beam covering the location of the terminal device, and the beam identification information may be included in the RRC connection establishment complete (RRC Setup Complete) message sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the beam identification information may also be obtained by the access network device through an internal algorithm.
  • the TAC list is determined by the access network device according to the second location information reported by the terminal device and sent to the core network device.
  • the TAC list in this embodiment may include one or more TACs, which is not limited here.
  • the above TAC list may also be replaced with a TAI list, which is not limited here.
  • the core network device since the core network device does not perceive the specific location of the terminal device, it only processes the TAC list, which is conducive to compatibility with the existing technology, and can determine the distance threshold when the UE cannot report the location before security is established. It is beneficial to determine the registration area as early as possible, improve the accuracy of the registration area, and improve the paging performance.
  • the core network device may send the aforementioned second distance threshold to the terminal device through the access network device, so that The terminal device can trigger a registration update process based on the second reference location and the second distance threshold. It is beneficial to keep parameters such as the reference position and/or distance threshold used by the terminal device consistent with parameters such as the reference position and/or distance threshold determined by the core network device.
  • the core network device can report the location information of the terminal device determined by the access network device to the core network device according to the instruction of the core network device, the core network device can The location information of the terminal device is acquired in time and used to determine the paging area or registration area of the terminal device, which improves the timeliness and accuracy of paging management and/or registration management of the terminal device.
  • the core network device can obtain the location information of the terminal device without going through the registration update process, and the terminal device does not need to initiate an unnecessary registration update process to report the location information, it is beneficial to save the terminal device from triggering the registration update process. Signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device has not triggered registration update based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold, it means that the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location is smaller than the aforementioned first distance threshold.
  • the core network device and the terminal device can update the first reference position (for example, replace the first reference position with the current position of the terminal device), the distance between the position of the terminal device and the updated first reference position will be shortened.
  • the distance is beneficial to reduce the frequency of registration update triggered by the terminal device, and to prolong the time interval between the registration update process triggered by the terminal device.
  • the satellite's Beam movement leads to frequent changes in the tracking area (trace area, TA) and cell identity of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can also report the target location to the access network device without triggering a registration update, and update the first reference based on the target location. location, so that the terminal device is always located in the registration area without frequently triggering registration updates, which helps to save signaling overhead caused by triggering the registration update process, and also helps to save power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the core network device determines the paging area of the terminal device based on the first location information
  • the core network device determines the paging area of the terminal device based on the first location information
  • Step 209 the core network device determines the TAC corresponding to the first location information according to the first correspondence and the first location information.
  • step 209 is an optional step.
  • the first location information may be represented by geographic location information.
  • the core network device After receiving the first location information indicating the target location, the core network device can determine the geographical area where the target location is located. Furthermore, the core network device The TAC corresponding to the geographical area can be determined, wherein the first correspondence is a correspondence between the geographical area and the TAC.
  • the first correspondence is a correspondence between the geographical area and the TAC.
  • the core network equipment can convert the target location represented by geographical location information such as longitude and latitude into a tracking area code TAC, so that certain strategies implemented based on the TAC within the core network equipment (for example, select an SMF entity or a UPF entity based on the TAC. ) can be interfaced with the registration update mechanism based on reference location and distance threshold. It is beneficial to improve the compatibility between the registration update mechanism based on the reference position and the distance threshold and the TAC-based registration update mechanism in the traditional technology, so as to make the system run smoothly.
  • the access network device determines whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the first Three distance thresholds (for example, distance threshold A introduced above). Among them, the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 401 the core network device sends registration update rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the registration update rule information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • the registration update rule information is used to indicate the registration update rule based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold, that is, when the distance between the location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the The terminal device triggers the registration update process.
  • the registration update rule information includes a first distance threshold.
  • the registration update rule information includes the first reference location.
  • the terminal device will use the location sent when the registration update process was triggered last time as the first reference location.
  • the registration update rule information may be carried in a message sent by the core network device to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device NAS can send the location information of the terminal device to the core network device through a registration request (Registration Request) message, and then the core network device is based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device configures registration update rule information, and sends the registration update rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through a Registration Accept (Registration Accept) message.
  • the registration update rule information is also It may not be included in the Registration Accept (Registration Accept) message, but sent as an independent message to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device. Specifically, this application does not limit the types of messages carrying registration update rule information.
  • Step 402 the core network device sends the first information including the first rule information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the first information including the first rule information from the core network device.
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target position includes the position of the terminal device when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold. It can also be understood that the first rule information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold is determined as the target position.
  • the first rule information includes a third distance threshold, and the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the third distance threshold and the first rule information may be included in a message sent by the core network device to the access network device, or may be sent by the core network device to the access network device through other messages, specifically There is no limit here.
  • the first rule information can indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the position of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the access network device, that is, the first rule information can indicate the difference between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position.
  • the device whose distance between them reaches the third distance threshold is an access network device.
  • the access network device determines that the access network device is the subject of decision-making based on factors such as the current network quality, that is, the access network device judges the current location of the terminal device by itself. Whether the distance between the first reference positions reaches the threshold. Specifically, please refer to the related introduction of Example 2.1 of the second way in step 201 above.
  • first rule information in this embodiment may be implemented in any of the aforementioned implementation manners, and for the beneficial effects of each implementation manner, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the aforementioned third distance threshold may be a distance threshold determined and issued by the core network device, that is, a distance threshold determined by the core network device based on a certain rule or algorithm as the third distance threshold;
  • the distance threshold may also be the distance threshold confirmed by the access network device and sent to the core network before step 401; the third distance threshold may also be the distance threshold stipulated in the protocol, which is not limited here.
  • the first reference location may be the latest location of the terminal device reported by the terminal device before step 401, for example, the terminal device reported to the core network device by triggering the registration update process before step 401
  • the first reference position can also be the position confirmed and issued by the core network equipment based on a certain rule or algorithm; the first reference position can also be the access network equipment based on a certain rule or The position confirmed by the algorithm and sent to the core network device; the first reference position can also be determined by the terminal device based on a certain rule or algorithm and sent to the access network device and/or core network device; the first The reference location may also be a location calculated by the core network device based on the historically reported location of the terminal device and a certain algorithm.
  • a statistical value for example, an average value
  • the position is calculated through a filtering algorithm (for example, an alpha (alpha) filtering algorithm).
  • a filtering algorithm for example, an alpha (alpha) filtering algorithm
  • the first information further includes second indication information.
  • second indication information please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 403 when it is determined that the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold, the access network device sends second information including the first indication information to the AS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal The AS of the device receives second information including the first indication information from the access network device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the second information when the first information includes the second indication information, the second information also includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the second information sent by the access network device to the AS of the terminal device when it is determined that the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold, the second information sent by the access network device to the AS of the terminal device not only includes the first indication information but also Including the second indication information.
  • step 403 For the detailed introduction of step 403, reference may be made to the relevant content in the aforementioned step 202, and details are not repeated here.
  • Step 404 the AS of the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device in response to the first indication information, and determines the current location of the terminal device as the target location.
  • the AS of the terminal device obtains the location of the terminal device, for example, through a module capable of obtaining location information such as GPS or GNSS.
  • the AS of the terminal device determines that the first position determined by the AS of the terminal device after receiving the first indication information or the position of the terminal device when the terminal device receives the first indication information is the target position .
  • the AS of the terminal device can obtain the location of the terminal device according to the first indication information and determine the obtained location of the terminal device as the target location. Because the terminal device generally performs signaling interaction with the access network device through the AS of the terminal device, and interacts with the core network device through the NAS of the terminal device. Therefore, determining the target location by the AS of the terminal device is beneficial for the terminal device to report the target location to the access network device through the AS of the terminal device. In addition, it is also beneficial to make the registration update mechanism based on the reference location and distance threshold in the traditional technology compatible with the information update method proposed in this application.
  • Step 405 the AS of the terminal device sends the target location to the NAS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • step 405 may be triggered by the second indication information received by the AS of the terminal device, that is, after the AS of the terminal device receives the second indication information, the AS of the terminal device has the ability to The NAS of the device sends the function of the target location.
  • step 405 may also be specified by the protocol, that is, the protocol stipulates that after the AS of the terminal device receives the target location, the AS of the terminal device can send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device. The target location of the device.
  • Step 406 the NAS of the terminal device determines a second reference position based on the target position.
  • the second reference location is used to trigger a registration update process.
  • the NAS of the terminal device directly adopts the target location as the second reference location, and determines whether to trigger a registration update procedure based on the second reference location. Because, before step 406, the NAS of the terminal device determines whether to trigger the registration update process based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold, and after step 406, the NAS of the terminal device determines whether to trigger the registration update process based on the second reference location and the first distance threshold The threshold determines whether to trigger the registration update process. Therefore, it can be understood that the NAS of the terminal device replaces or updates the first reference position with the second reference position.
  • the NAS of the terminal device will use the second reference location and the first distance threshold as parameters for triggering the registration update procedure. That is to say, after the NAS of the terminal device determines that the distance between the location of the terminal device and the second reference location reaches the first distance threshold, the NAS of the terminal device will not trigger the registration update process.
  • Step 407 the AS of the terminal device sends the second location information indicating the target location to the access network device;
  • the network access device receives second location information indicating the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • step 407 may be performed after step 404 and before step 405; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 405 and before step 406; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 406.
  • step 407 may be performed after step 404 and before step 405; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 405 and before step 406; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 406.
  • step 407 may be performed after step 404 and before step 405; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 405 and before step 406; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 406.
  • step 407 may be performed after step 404 and before step 405; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 405 and before step 406; for another example, step 407 may be performed after step 406.
  • Step 408 the access network device sends the first location information indicating the target location to the core network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the first location information indicating the target location from the access network device.
  • the second location information is the information received by the access network device from the AS of the terminal device to indicate the target location;
  • the first location information is the information that the access network device needs to send to the core network device to indicate the target location .
  • the first location information is determined by the access network device based on the second location information. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 206 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 409 the core network device determines a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold based on the target location.
  • the core network device may determine the second reference position only based on the target position, and it may also be understood that the core network device updates the first reference position based on the target position to obtain the second reference position; the core network device may also Determining the second reference position and the second distance threshold based on the target position can also be understood as that the core network device simultaneously updates the first reference position and the first distance threshold based on the target position to obtain the second reference position and the second distance threshold.
  • Step 410 the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the core network device only determines the second reference position based on the target position without determining other distance thresholds. At this time, the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the second reference location.
  • the core network device simultaneously determines the second reference location and the second distance threshold based on the target location. At this time, the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the second reference location and the second distance threshold.
  • step 409 and step 410 please refer to the relevant introduction in the previous step 208, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device does not need to perform a series of registration update procedures such as registration request messages and registration acceptance messages, it can determine the location of the terminal device after receiving the first indication information, and only the location of the terminal device ( That is, the second location information indicating the target location) is reported to the access network device, and then the access network device reports the aforementioned target location to the core network device. Therefore, not only is it beneficial for the core network equipment to obtain the location information of the terminal equipment in a timely manner, but also the signaling overhead caused by triggering the registration update process can be saved.
  • the access network device sends the first rule information to the terminal device, and the terminal device determines whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold.
  • the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 501 the core network device sends registration update rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the registration update rule information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • step 501 is similar to step 401.
  • step 501 is similar to step 401.
  • Step 502 the core network device sends the first information including the first rule information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the first information including the first rule information from the core network device.
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target position includes the position of the terminal device when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold. It can also be understood that the first rule information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold is determined as the target position.
  • the first rule information includes a third distance threshold, and the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the third distance threshold and the first rule information may be included in a message sent by the core network device to the access network device, or may be sent by the core network device to the access network device through other messages. Do limited.
  • the first rule information can indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the position of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device, that is, the first rule information can indicate the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position.
  • the device whose distance reaches the third distance threshold is a terminal device.
  • the first rule information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the position of the terminal device when the distance from the first reference position reaches a third distance threshold as the target position.
  • a third distance threshold as the target position.
  • the first rule information may not indicate that the decision subject for judging whether the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule is the terminal device or the access network device, but is handed over to the access network device for implementation. That is to say, after the access network device receives the first rule information, based on the current network quality and other factors, the terminal device is determined to be the decision subject, that is, the terminal device judges whether the distance between its current location and the first reference location is Threshold reached. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction of Example 2.2 of the first way in step 201 above.
  • first rule information in this embodiment may be implemented in any of the aforementioned implementation manners, and for the beneficial effects of each implementation manner, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first information further includes second indication information.
  • second indication information please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 503 the access network device sends the second information including the first rule information to the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second information including the first rule information from the access network device.
  • the access network device since the terminal device judges whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the third distance threshold, the access network device receives the first rule information and parses the first After a piece of rule information, the access network device will send the first rule information to the AS of the terminal device.
  • the first rule information sent by the access network device to the AS of the terminal device may be the same in content and/or form as the first rule information received by the access network device from the core network device. different, it is not limited here.
  • the second information when the first information includes the second indication information, the second information also includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the NAS of the terminal device to update the first reference position based on the target position. It can also be understood that the second indication information is used to instruct the NAS of the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process according to the target location.
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • Step 504 the AS of the terminal device determines that the distance from the first reference position reaches the third distance according to the first rule information.
  • the position of the terminal device away from the threshold is the target position.
  • the AS of the terminal device can judge the distance between the current position of the terminal device and the first reference position based on the first rule information. When the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the third distance threshold, the AS of the terminal device determines that the current location of the terminal device is the target location.
  • the AS of the terminal device may periodically or aperiodically obtain the current location of the terminal device based on the method of determining the location of the terminal device configured in the traditional technology.
  • the AS of the terminal device determines that the current position of the terminal device is the target position.
  • Step 505 the AS of the terminal device sends the target location to the NAS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 506 the NAS of the terminal device determines a second reference position based on the target position.
  • Step 507 the AS of the terminal device sends the second location information indicating the target location to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the second location information indicating the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 508 the access network device sends the first location information indicating the target location to the core network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the first location information indicating the target location from the access network device.
  • the second location information is the information received by the access network device from the AS of the terminal device to indicate the target location;
  • the first location information is the information that the access network device needs to send to the core network device to indicate the target location .
  • the first location information is determined by the access network device based on the second location information. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 206 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 509 the core network device determines a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold based on the target location.
  • Step 510 the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold.
  • steps 505 to 510 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 505 to 510 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 405 to 410 please refer to relevant introductions of steps 405 to 410 above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device does not need to execute a series of registration update procedures such as registration request messages and registration acceptance messages, it can determine the target location when it is determined that the location of the terminal device satisfies the first rule information, and only the terminal device's The location (that is, the second location information indicating the location of the target) is reported to the access network device, and then the access network device reports the aforementioned target location to the core network device. Therefore, not only is it beneficial for the core network equipment to obtain the location information of the terminal equipment in a timely manner, but also the signaling overhead caused by triggering the registration update process can be saved.
  • a series of registration update procedures such as registration request messages and registration acceptance messages
  • each location sent by the terminal device to the access network device is a target location, that is, the access
  • the network device determines each position of the terminal device received from the terminal device as a target position.
  • the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 601 the core network device sends registration update rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the registration update rule information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • step 601 is similar to step 401.
  • step 601 is similar to step 401.
  • Step 602 the core network device sends the first information including the second rule information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the first information including the second rule information from the core network device.
  • the first information further includes second indication information.
  • second indication information please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 603 the access network device sends the second information including the second rule information to the AS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second information including the second rule information from the access network device.
  • the second rule information sent by the access network device to the AS of the terminal device may be the same or different in content and/or form from the second rule information received by the access network device from the core network device. This is not limited.
  • the second information when the first information includes the second indication information, the second information also includes the second indication information.
  • Step 604 the AS of the terminal device determines that each location of the terminal device sent to the access network device is a target location according to the second rule information.
  • the terminal device may have been configured with configuration information for determining the location of the terminal device, for example, a handover-based measurement configuration and the like. No matter whether the terminal device receives the aforementioned second rule information, the terminal device determines the position of the terminal device based on the configured configuration information for determining the position of the terminal device. After the terminal device receives the aforementioned second rule information, the terminal device determines each determined location as a target location, and sends each of the aforementioned target locations to the access network device.
  • Step 605 the AS of the terminal device sends the target location to the NAS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 606 the NAS of the terminal device determines a second reference position based on the target position.
  • Step 607 the AS of the terminal device sends the second location information indicating the target location to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the second location information indicating the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 608 the access network device sends the first location information indicating the target location to the core network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the first location information indicating the target location from the access network device.
  • the first location information is determined by the access network device based on the second location information. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 206 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 609 the core network device determines a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold based on the target location.
  • Step 610 the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold.
  • steps 605 to 610 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 605 to 610 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 405 to 410 please refer to relevant introductions of steps 405 to 410 above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the access network device in this embodiment can report the location of the terminal device from The location of the terminal device received by the AS of the terminal device is reported to the core network device as the target location, instead of reporting the location of the terminal device to the core network device through a series of registration update processes such as registration request messages and registration acceptance messages. Therefore, signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the terminal device can report each location obtained by the terminal device as a target location to the access network device based on the second rule information, and the access network device can perceive each location of the terminal device from the terminal device. s position, And report each position from the terminal device as a target position to the core network device. Therefore, the location of the terminal device can be reported to the core network device independently of the registration update process, which not only improves the timeliness and accuracy of the core network device to obtain the terminal device, but also saves signaling overhead.
  • the access network device determines whether the distance between the position of the terminal device and the first reference position reaches the first reference position.
  • Three distance thresholds are possible. Among them, the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 701 the core network device sends registration update rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the registration update rule information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • step 701 is similar to step 401.
  • step 701 is similar to step 401.
  • Step 702 the core network device sends the first information including the third rule information to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the first information including the third rule information from the core network device.
  • the first information further includes second indication information.
  • second indication information please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 703 when it is determined that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended, the access network device sends the second information including the first indication information to the AS of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the second information when the first information includes the second indication information, the second information also includes the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the NAS of the terminal device to update the first reference position based on the target position. It can also be understood that the second indication information is used to instruct the NAS of the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process according to the target location.
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • step 703 For the detailed introduction of step 703, reference may be made to the relevant content in the aforementioned step 202, and details are not repeated here.
  • Step 704 the AS of the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device in response to the first indication information, and determines the current location of the terminal device as the target location.
  • Step 705 the AS of the terminal device sends the target location to the NAS of the terminal device; correspondingly, the NAS of the terminal device receives the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 706 the NAS of the terminal device determines a second reference position based on the target position.
  • Step 707 the AS of the terminal device sends the second location information indicating the target location to the access network device; correspondingly, the access network device receives the second location information indicating the target location from the AS of the terminal device.
  • Step 708 the access network device sends the first location information indicating the target location to the core network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the first location information indicating the target location from the access network device.
  • the first location information is determined by the access network device based on the second location information. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 206 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 709 the core network device determines a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold based on the target location.
  • Step 710 the core network device determines the paging area and/or the terminal device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold or register area.
  • steps 705 to 710 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 405 to 410 are similar to steps 405 to 410 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • steps 405 to 410 please refer to relevant introductions of steps 405 to 410 above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the access network device can determine whether the terminal device needs to be released or suspended based on the third rule information, and the access network device can report to the terminal device when the terminal device needs to be released or suspended.
  • the AS sends the first indication information. Therefore, before the AS of the terminal device enters the unconnected state (for example, inactive state or idle state), the AS of the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device as the target location according to the first indication information, so that the access network The device sends the aforementioned target location to the core network device.
  • the network side can obtain the target location of the terminal device before the terminal device is released or suspended, and determine the registration area based on the target location of the terminal device, it is possible to prevent the terminal device from leaving the registration area shortly after entering the idle state or inactive state. Instead, the registration update process is triggered. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the frequency of registration update and save signaling overhead.
  • step 405 (or step 505, or step 605, or step 705)
  • step 407 or step 507, or step 607, or step 707)
  • step 408 or step 508, or step 608, or the content sent in step 708
  • the AS of the terminal device can determine the second reference position for updating the first reference position and the first distance threshold for updating the second distance threshold based on the target position. distance threshold.
  • the aforementioned step 405 (or step 505, or step 605, or step 705) may be replaced by the AS of the terminal device sending the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • step 406 the NAS of the terminal device can directly update the configuration of the core network device based on the received second reference position and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the first reference position and/or the first distance threshold In step 407 (or step 507, or step 607, or step 707), the AS of the terminal device will send the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold to the access network device.
  • step 408 or step 508, or step 608, or step 708), the access network device will also send the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold to the core network device.
  • step 409 the core network device may directly update the first reference position and/or the first distance threshold based on the received second reference position and/or the second distance threshold .
  • the above-mentioned embodiments corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 in this application can be combined or referred to each other. 2. Combination of the embodiments corresponding to Fig. 4 , Fig. 5 and Fig. 6 . It should be noted that when the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 7 is combined with the embodiment corresponding to FIG.
  • the first information sent by the core network device to the access network device includes first rule information and third rule information, and the access network device
  • the first indication information sent to the terminal device may be determined by the access network device based on the first rule information, or may be determined by the access network device based on the third rule information.
  • the terminal device does not perceive the reason for receiving the first indication information, and the terminal device can only know that it needs to determine the position of the terminal device as the target position after receiving the first indication information.
  • the first indication information in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 7 and the first indication information in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 4 may be represented by different indication information respectively.
  • the first indication information in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 7 is represented by indication information 1
  • the indication information 1 and the indication information 2 may also respectively carry a reason for sending the aforementioned indication information.
  • the terminal device can determine based on which rule the access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device based on the received first indication information.
  • the access network device is not aware of the registration update process, and is only used for transparent transmission of messages between the terminal device and the core network device. Among them, the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 801 the core network device sends the third information to the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the third information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • the third information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the third location information of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device, and the third location information is used to indicate the target location reported by the terminal device to the core network device .
  • the third information may be rule information, which is used to determine a rule for the terminal device to report the third location information to the core network device. That is to say, after the terminal device receives the aforementioned third information, the terminal device can determine how to obtain the aforementioned target location based on the third information, and how to report the first location information indicating the aforementioned target location to the core network device .
  • the third location information is used by the core network equipment to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal equipment.
  • the paging area and the registration area may be the same area.
  • the paging area and the registration area may be different areas, for example, the paging area includes the registration area and is larger than the registration area.
  • the foregoing target location is a location determined by the terminal device through the third information, and the location is used by the terminal device to determine a trigger condition of the registration update process.
  • step 802 for the introduction of the processing procedure for the terminal device to determine the target location by using the third information.
  • step 803 for the introduction of the processing procedure for the terminal device to determine the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the target location.
  • the target location can adopt any of the following implementation methods:
  • the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position of the terminal device and the first reference position is smaller than the foregoing first distance threshold.
  • the target location may adopt any one of the foregoing implementation manners, and may also satisfy the foregoing two implementation manners at the same time, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the target position, the first reference position and the first distance threshold please refer to the relevant introduction in step 201 above, and details will not be repeated here.
  • the network device does not perceive the content of the third information), while the first information access network device perceives (that is, the access network device perceives the content of the first information).
  • the third information includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send a target location to the core network device through the access network device, and the target location includes the terminal device The location of the terminal device determined within a preset time frame before being released.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device sends the location of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device within the preset time range before being released, and the terminal device is released The position obtained within the preset time range is the target position.
  • the terminal device being released means that the terminal device enters an idle state from a connected state.
  • the core network device sends the third indication information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the terminal The NAS of the end device receives the third indication information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • the core network device instructs the terminal device to report the location of the terminal device through the access network device before being released, which is beneficial for the core network device to know the location of the terminal device. It is beneficial for the core network equipment to perform registration area management and/or paging area management on the terminal equipment.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate to the terminal device that the position determined after receiving the fourth indication information is the target position.
  • the position of the terminal device determined after the terminal device receives the fourth indication information may be the first position determined after the terminal device receives the fourth indication information, or it may be the first position determined by the terminal device after receiving the fourth indication information. The location of the terminal device when the information is indicated.
  • the core network device can communicate with the NAS of the terminal device when the terminal device is in the connected state.
  • the core network device can sense whether the terminal device is about to be released.
  • the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be released, the core network device will send the aforementioned fourth indication information to the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device, so that the NAS of the terminal device can pass the access
  • the network access device reports the location of the terminal device to the core network device.
  • the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to be released, it may be that the access network device requests the core network device to release the terminal device; it may also be that the core network device independently determines that the terminal device needs to be released.
  • the terminal device acquires the current location of the terminal device as the target location only after receiving the fourth indication information, which is beneficial to reduce the complexity of the terminal device.
  • the third information includes fourth rule information, where the fourth rule information is used to instruct the terminal device to determine the target location according to fourth indication information from the core network device, and the fourth rule information The indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the current location of the terminal device to the core network device through the access network device.
  • the core network device can not only send the fourth instruction information to the NAS of the terminal device when the terminal device is about to be released, but also send the fourth instruction information to the NAS of the terminal device before sending the fourth instruction information.
  • the NAS sends the fourth rule information, so that the NAS of the terminal device can know the reason for receiving the fourth indication information.
  • the fourth rule information is sent before the fourth indication information.
  • the core network device sends the foregoing fourth rule information to the NAS of the terminal device through a different message.
  • Step 802 the terminal device determines the target location according to the third information.
  • the NAS of the terminal device determines the target location according to the third information.
  • the NAS of the terminal device determines the target location in different ways.
  • the third information includes the foregoing third indication information.
  • the NAS of the terminal device can determine whether the terminal device needs to be released.
  • the NAS of the terminal device obtains the location of the terminal device, and the terminal device The location obtained by the NAS is used as the target location and sent to the core network device through the access network device.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the location determined by the NAS of the terminal device after receiving the fourth indication information is the target location.
  • the NAS of the terminal device receives the fourth instruction information from the core network device, it means that the core network device has determined that the terminal device will be released, and then the NAS of the terminal device will receive the fourth instruction information.
  • the obtained position of the terminal device is determined as the target position.
  • the NAS of the terminal device may obtain the current position of the terminal device through modules such as GPS or GNSS, and determine the obtained current position of the terminal device as the target position.
  • the NAS of the terminal device may also acquire the current location of the terminal device from the AS of the terminal device.
  • the NAS of the terminal device can also reuse the terminal device after being released The location of the terminal device determined within the previous preset time range. Specifically, there is no limitation here.
  • Step 803 the terminal device determines the trigger condition of the registration update process based on the target location.
  • the NAS of the terminal device determines a second reference location according to the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger a registration update procedure. It can also be understood that the NAS of the terminal device updates the first reference location based on the target location to obtain the second reference location. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in step 204 above, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 804 the terminal device sends the third location information to the core network device through the access network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives the third location information from the terminal device through the access network device.
  • the NAS of the terminal device sends the third location information for indicating the aforementioned target location to the core network device through the access network device; correspondingly, the core network device receives from the NAS of the terminal device through the access network device The third location information of the target location.
  • step 803 and step 804 are not limited to a specific time sequence. That is to say, the terminal device may first perform step 803 and then perform step 804, or may first perform step 804 and then perform step 803, or may perform step 803 and step 804 at the same time.
  • the specific embodiment is not limited.
  • Step 805 the core network device determines the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device based on the third location information.
  • step 805 the content of step 805 is similar to that of step 208 in the foregoing embodiments.
  • step 208 please refer to the relevant introduction of the foregoing step 208, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 806 the core network device determines the TAC corresponding to the third location information according to the first correspondence and the third location information.
  • step 806 is an optional step.
  • the third location information may be represented by geographic location information.
  • the manner in which the third location information is represented by the geographic location information is similar to the manner in which the first location information is represented by the geographic location information.
  • step 806 The content of step 806 is similar to that of step 209 in the above-mentioned embodiment. For details, please refer to the related introduction of step 209 above, and details are not repeated here.
  • the NAS of the terminal device can acquire the current location of the terminal device and determine the location as the target location before the terminal device is released, or, the NAS of the terminal device can Obtain the location of the terminal device to determine the target location under the instruction of . Because the NAS of the terminal device and the core network device can directly interact with the target location, so that the NAS of the terminal device and the core network device respectively update the first reference location based on the target location. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the frequency that the NAS of the terminal device triggers the registration update process, and it is beneficial to prolong the time between triggering the registration update process.
  • a paging method is proposed. As shown in FIG. 9 , it is the main flow of the paging method proposed in this application. Among them, the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • a core network device acquires a second reference location and/or a second distance threshold.
  • the second reference position is a new reference position determined based on the target position, for example, the second reference position is a new reference position obtained by updating the first reference position based on the target position.
  • the second reference position is directly equal to the target position.
  • the second reference position can be based on the embodiment corresponding to Fig. 2, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7 and Fig. 8 The second reference position determined by any embodiment.
  • the second distance threshold is a new distance threshold determined based on the target position, for example, the second distance threshold is a new distance threshold obtained by updating the first distance threshold based on the target position. For another example, the second distance threshold is equal to the first distance threshold. Optionally, the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the second distance threshold may be the second distance threshold determined based on any one of the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8 .
  • Step 902 the core network device determines a paging area based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold, and then determines a target access network device for paging the terminal device.
  • the target access network device is an access network device determined by the core network device that can currently provide services for the terminal device.
  • the core network device may only determine one target access network device, or may determine multiple target access network devices, which are not specifically limited here. It should be noted that since the terminal device can move, the target access network device does not necessarily include the access network device that provides the target location to the core network device in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the core network device determines the first geographical area according to the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold; the core network device determines that the access network device located in the first geographical area is the target access network access equipment.
  • the core network device determines the first geographic area based on the second reference location and the first distance threshold. For example, the core network device determines that a circular area with the second reference location as the center and the first distance threshold as the radius is the aforementioned first geographic area. For another example, the core network device determines that a rectangular area with the second reference position as the geometric center of the rectangle and with the first distance threshold as the geometric center to the side of the rectangle is the aforementioned first geographic area.
  • the core network device determines the first geographical area based on the second reference location and the second distance threshold . For example, the core network device determines that a circular area with the second reference location as the center and the second distance threshold as the radius is the aforementioned first geographic area. For another example, the core network device determines that a rectangular area with the second reference position as the geometric center of the rectangle and with the second distance threshold as the geometric center to the side of the rectangle is the aforementioned first geographic area.
  • the core network device determines the first geographic area based on the TAC list and the second distance threshold.
  • the method for determining the TAC list and the second distance threshold refers to the description in step 208, which will not be repeated here.
  • the core network device After the core network device receives the new TAC list determined by the access network device according to the location information reported by the terminal device from the access network device, the core network device updates the TAC list. Further, the core network device updates the first geographical area based on the updated TAC list and the second distance threshold.
  • the location information reported by the terminal device may indicate the aforementioned target location that can be used to update the first reference location, or may indicate other locations (or common locations) of the user equipment that are not used to update the first reference location.
  • the core network device determines the first geographic area based on the TAC list and the first distance threshold.
  • the method for determining the TAC list includes the method described in step 208, and also includes the terminal equipment reporting a common location (non-target location), and the access network equipment determines the TAC list according to the common location reported by the terminal equipment, and reports the list to the core network equipment, the core network equipment receives and determines the TAC list.
  • the terminal device may determine the foregoing first geographic area by using any of the foregoing implementation manners.
  • the core network device obtains the location change information of the terminal device, and the location change The information is used to indicate the moving direction and/or moving speed of the terminal device; the core network device determines the second geographical area according to at least one of the second reference position and the second distance threshold, and the position change information; the core The network device determines that the access network device located in the second geographical area is the target access network device.
  • the core network device may first determine the first geographic area according to the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold; then, the core network device determines the second geographic area according to the position change information and the first geographic area . For example, when the terminal device moves along a first direction and at a first speed, the core network device moves the first geographic area for a distance according to the aforementioned first direction and first speed to obtain the second geographic area.
  • the second geographic area is more accurate than the first geographic area, however, the second geographic area is not necessarily smaller than the first geographic area.
  • both the aforementioned first geographic area and the second geographic area are represented by geographic areas, rather than the area corresponding to the TAC, and there is no need to convert the geographic area into a TAC or an area corresponding to the TAC.
  • Step 903 the core network device sends a first paging message to the target access network device.
  • the first paging message carries the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold, so that the target access network device can further filter the paging area based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold, thereby enabling more accurate paging terminal equipment.
  • the core network device sends the first paging message to each target access network device; correspondingly, the target access network device receives a paging message from the core network device First paging message.
  • Step 904 the target access network device determines the target cell and/or the target beam coverage area from the multiple cells of the target access network device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the target access network device may select one or more cells from the multiple cells as the target cell based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold.
  • the target access network device may select a cell close to the second reference position as the target cell.
  • the coverage area of a beam is smaller than the coverage area of a cell.
  • the target access network device may also select one or more beam coverage areas from one or more cells.
  • the target access network device may select a beam coverage area close to the second reference position as the target beam coverage area.
  • Step 905 the access network device sends a second paging message for paging the terminal device.
  • the access network device sends a paging message within the coverage area of the target cell and/or target beam, and the paging message is used to page the terminal device.
  • the core network device can filter out a target access network device from multiple access network devices based on the second reference location and/or the second distance threshold, and then the target access network device can be based on the second reference The location and/or the second distance threshold screen out the target cell and/or target beam coverage area from the multiple cells. Therefore, the access network device can page the terminal device within a small range, thereby reducing signaling overhead, saving air interface resources, and improving system performance.
  • this application also proposes a method for processing movement restriction information, as shown in FIG. 10 , which is the main flow of the method for processing movement restriction information proposed by this application.
  • the core network equipment, access network equipment and terminal equipment will perform the following steps.
  • Step 1001 the core network sends movement restriction information to the terminal device through the access network device; correspondingly, the terminal device receives the movement restriction information from the core network device through the access network device.
  • the movement restriction information includes forbidden area (Forbidden Area) information and service area restriction (Service Area Restrictions) information, etc.
  • the forbidden area information includes the forbidden area.
  • the terminal device is not allowed to initiate any communication with the network side.
  • the service area restriction information includes a restricted service area and/or an unrestricted service area. In the restricted service area, the terminal device may not be allowed to initiate a service request, or the terminal device may not be allowed to initiate session-related signaling and the like.
  • the movement restriction information is area information based on geographical location.
  • the movement restriction information can be represented by geographic location areas such as national regions, administrative regions, and grids determined based on latitude and longitude, instead of being converted into TAI or corresponding to TAI. Area.
  • a network-side device (for example, an access network device or a core network device) may directly save geographic location area information related to movement restrictions instead of TAI related information.
  • the movement restriction information may be a movement restriction list based on geographic location area. Since geographical location-based area information can describe a smaller area than TAI, it is beneficial to improve the accuracy of the network side (access network equipment or core network equipment) for mobility restriction management on terminal equipment, and is also conducive to compatibility. Registration update method based on reference position and distance threshold.
  • the movement restriction information may be sent by the core network device to the NSA layer of the terminal device through a NAS message.
  • the movement restriction information may be carried in a registration acceptance (Registration Accept) message sent to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • Step 1002 the terminal device processes operations related to movement restriction based on the movement restriction information.
  • the NAS of the terminal device uses the movement restriction information to process related operations such as prohibition area and/or service area restriction.
  • the movement restriction information includes service area restriction information
  • the service area restriction information includes a restricted service area.
  • the terminal device may perform the following operations related to movement restriction.
  • the terminal device does not initiate a session-related process within the restricted service area, nor can it initiate a service request (service request, SR).
  • the core network device may determine whether the terminal device is currently in a restricted service area. If the terminal device is located in the restricted service area, the AMF entity rejects the procedure initiated by the terminal device. In addition, the SMF entity that manages the session will also subscribe to the AMF entity for the notification that the terminal device moves into the restricted service area, and when the terminal device moves into the restricted service area, the SMF entity initiates the deactivation of the session.
  • the movement restriction information includes forbidden area information, and the forbidden area information includes forbidden areas.
  • the terminal device may perform the following operations related to movement restriction.
  • the terminal device determines that it is in a prohibited area, the terminal device does not actively initiate a connection.
  • the core network device may reject the terminal device's access according to the location of the terminal device.
  • Step 1003 the core network device sends movement restriction information to the first access network device; correspondingly, the first access network device receives the movement restriction information from the core network device.
  • the first access network device may be an access network device that provides services for the terminal device, or the first access network device is an access network device where the terminal device currently resides.
  • the movement restriction information is geographically based area information.
  • Step 1004 the first access network device processes movement restriction related operations based on the movement restriction information.
  • the first access network device uses the movement restriction information to process related operations such as prohibited areas and/or service area restrictions. do.
  • the operations related to processing forbidden area and/or service area restriction include: the first access network device determines whether to release the terminal according to the forbidden area information and/or service area restriction information in the movement restriction information device or select a target cell for the terminal device. For example, in the connected state, the first access network device judges whether the terminal device is located in a prohibited area and/or a restricted service area according to the GNSS location information of the terminal device. If the terminal device is in a prohibited area and/or a restricted service area, the first access network device releases the connection with the terminal device, or the first access network device sends a core network device (for example, an AMF entity) A notification is sent indicating that the terminal device has moved into a prohibited area and/or a restricted service area.
  • a core network device for example, an AMF entity
  • Step 1005 the first access network device sends movement restriction information to the second access network device; correspondingly, the second access network device receives movement restriction information from the first access network device.
  • the movement restriction information is geographically based area information.
  • the second access network device includes an access network device that provides services for the terminal device after the terminal device is handed over. It can be understood that the terminal device switches from the aforementioned first access network device to the second access network device, that is, the aforementioned first access network device is the source access network device, and the second access network device is the target access network device. equipment.
  • the movement restriction information may be carried in a handover request (HandoverRequest) message sent by the first access network device to the second access network device.
  • HandoverRequest handover request
  • satellites are used as relays or access network equipment, and the regional information of the geographic location is used to represent movement restriction information. Since geographical location-based area information can describe a smaller area than TAI, it is beneficial to perform more accurate mobile restriction management on terminal devices, and avoid areas covered by mobile restriction information due to excessive satellite beam coverage ( For example, the mobile restriction failure problem caused by too small forbidden area, restricted service area or unrestricted service area).
  • FIG. 11 it is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 110 provided in this embodiment.
  • the access network device in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 may be based on the method shown in FIG. The structure of the communication device 110.
  • the access network device of the subsequent evolution standard executes the method involved in the embodiment of the present application, the access network device of the subsequent evolution standard may also use the communication device 110 shown in FIG. 11 in this embodiment. structure.
  • the communication device 110 includes at least one processor 1101 , at least one memory 1102 , at least one transceiver 1103 , at least one network interface 1105 and one or more antennas 1104 .
  • the processor 1101 , the memory 1102 , the transceiver 1103 and the network interface 1105 are connected through a connection device, and the antenna 1104 is connected to the transceiver 1103 .
  • the foregoing connection device may include various types of interfaces, transmission lines or buses, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment.
  • the memory 1102 is mainly used for storing software programs and data.
  • the memory 1102 may exist independently and be connected to the processor 1101 .
  • the memory 1102 may be integrated with the processor 1101, for example, integrated into one or more chips.
  • the memory 1102 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1101 , and various types of computer program codes to be executed can also be regarded as drivers for the processor 1101 .
  • FIG. 11 in this embodiment only shows one memory and one processor.
  • the communication device 110 may have multiple processors or multiple memories, which are not specifically described here. limited.
  • the memory 1102 may also be called a storage medium or a storage device.
  • the memory 1102 may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor (that is, an on-chip storage element), or an independent storage element, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1103 can be used to support the receiving or sending of radio frequency signals between the communication device 110 and the terminal equipment, and the transceiver 1103 can be connected to the antenna 1104 .
  • the transceiver 1103 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
  • one or more antennas 1104 can receive radio frequency signals
  • the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1103 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas 1104, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals.
  • the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1101, so that the processor 1101 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing.
  • the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1103 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1101, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a One or more antennas 1104 transmit the radio frequency signal.
  • the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal.
  • the sequence of the aforementioned down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing The order is adjustable.
  • the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal.
  • the up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing The order of priority is adjustable.
  • Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
  • transceiver 1103 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the device used to realize the receiving function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used to realize the sending function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit also It can be called receiver, input port, receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit can be called transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the foregoing processor 1101 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire network equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs, for example, to support the communication device 110 to execute the described action.
  • the communication device 110 may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit, wherein the baseband processor is mainly used for processing communication protocols and communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used for controlling the entire communication device 110, executing software programs, and processing software Program data.
  • the processor 1101 shown in FIG. 11 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit can also be independent processors, interconnected through technologies such as a bus.
  • the communication device 110 may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the communication device 110 may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capability, and each component of the communication device 110 may be configured through various bus connection.
  • the baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the memory in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the aforementioned network interface 1105 is used to connect the communication device 110 with other communication devices through a communication link.
  • the network interface 1105 may include a network interface between the communication device 110 and a core network element, such as an S1 interface; the network interface 1105 may also include the communication device 110 and other network devices (such as other access network devices or a network interface between network elements of the core network), such as an X2 or Xn interface.
  • the communication device 110 is configured to execute the method in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 .
  • the processor 1101 is configured to control the transceiver 1103 to receive first information from the core network equipment, where the first information is used to instruct the access network equipment to send the terminal equipment information to the core network equipment. First location information. Then, the processor 1101 determines the first location information. Additionally, the processor 1101 is further configured to control the transceiver 1103 to send the first location information to the core network device, where the first location information is used by the core network device to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device.
  • the first location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined.
  • the processor 1101 is specifically configured to: send second information to the terminal device according to the first information, where the second information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the second location information to the access network device. information; determining the first location information according to second location information received from the terminal device, the second location information including the target location, the target location being the location of the terminal device determined by the terminal device based on the second information.
  • the first information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold The location of the terminal device, the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the processor 1101 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 1103 to send the second information.
  • the second information includes the first rule information.
  • the first information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device;
  • the second information includes the second rule information.
  • the transceiver 1103 is specifically configured to receive the position of each terminal device from the terminal device;
  • the processor 1101 is specifically configured to determine each position of the terminal device received from the terminal device as a target position.
  • the first information includes third rule information
  • the third rule information is used by the access network device to determine that the target location includes a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device The location of the terminal device obtained in .
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the processor 1101 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 1103 to send the second information to the terminal device when it is determined according to the third rule information that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended.
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the first information further includes second indication information
  • the second information further includes the second indication information
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the terminal device's AS to send the terminal device
  • the NAS sends the destination location.
  • the transceiver 1103 is further configured to receive a first paging message from the core network device, where the first paging message includes the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold; the The processor 1101 is further configured to determine a target cell and/or target beam coverage from multiple cells of the access network device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold Area; the transceiver 1103 is further configured to send a second paging message for paging the terminal device to the target cell and/or the target beam coverage area.
  • FIG. 12 it is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device 120 provided in this embodiment. It should be understood that the terminal device in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 may be based on the communication shown in FIG. Structure of device 120 .
  • the communication device 120 includes at least one processor 1201 , at least one memory 1202 and at least one transceiver 1203 . Wherein, the processor 1201, the memory 1202 and the transceiver 1203 are connected. Optionally, the communication device 120 may further include an input device 1205 , an output device 1206 and one or more antennas 1204 . Wherein, the antenna 1204 is connected to the transceiver 1203 , and the input device 1205 and the output device 1206 are connected to the processor 1201 .
  • the memory 1202 is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the memory 1202 may exist independently and be connected to the processor 1201 .
  • the memory 1202 may be integrated with the processor 1201, for example, integrated into one or more chips.
  • the memory 1202 can store the program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1201 , and various types of computer program codes executed can also be regarded as drivers for the processor 1201 .
  • FIG. 12 in this embodiment only shows one memory and one processor.
  • the communication device 120 may have multiple processors or multiple memories, which are not specifically described here. limited.
  • the memory 1202 may also be called a storage medium or a storage device.
  • the memory 1202 may be a storage element on the same chip as the processor (that is, an on-chip storage element), or an independent storage element, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiver 1203 may be used to support the receiving or sending of radio frequency signals between the communication device 120 and the access network equipment, and the transceiver 1203 may be connected to the antenna 1204 .
  • the transceiver 1203 includes a transmitter Tx and a receiver Rx.
  • one or more antennas 1204 can receive radio frequency signals
  • the receiver Rx of the transceiver 1203 is used to receive the radio frequency signals from the antennas 1204, convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals, and convert the radio frequency signals into digital baseband signals or digital intermediate frequency signals.
  • the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal is provided to the processor 1201, so that the processor 1201 performs further processing on the digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal, such as demodulation processing and decoding processing.
  • the transmitter Tx in the transceiver 1203 is also used to receive the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal from the processor 1201, and convert the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal into a radio frequency signal, and pass a
  • the radio frequency signal is transmitted by one or more antennas 1204 .
  • the receiver Rx can selectively perform one or more stages of down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing on the radio frequency signal to obtain a digital baseband signal or a digital intermediate frequency signal.
  • the sequence of the aforementioned down-mixing processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing The order is adjustable.
  • the transmitter Tx can selectively perform one or more stages of up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing on the modulated digital baseband signal or digital intermediate frequency signal to obtain a radio frequency signal.
  • the up-mixing processing and digital-to-analog conversion processing The order of priority is adjustable.
  • Digital baseband signals and digital intermediate frequency signals can be collectively referred to as digital signals.
  • transceiver 1203 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the device used to realize the receiving function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used to realize the sending function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit also It can be called receiver, input port, receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit can be called transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the processor 1201 may be a baseband processor, or may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the baseband processor and the CPU may be integrated or separated.
  • the processor 1201 can be used to implement various functions for the terminal device, for example, to process communication protocols and communication data, or to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process data of software programs; or
  • the processor 1201 is used to assist in the completion of computing processing tasks, such as graphics and image processing or audio processing, etc.; or the processor 1201 is used to implement one or more of the above functions.
  • the output device 1206 communicates with the processor 1201 and can display information in various ways, which are not limited here.
  • the communication device 120 is configured to execute the method of the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 .
  • the transceiver 1203 in the communication device 120 is used to receive the second information from the access network equipment, the second information is used to instruct the terminal equipment to send the second location information to the access network equipment;
  • the device 1203 is further configured to send the second location information to the access network device.
  • the processor 1201 in the communication device 120 is configured to determine a trigger condition of a registration update process based on the second location information.
  • the second location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the processor 1201 is specifically configured to determine a second reference location based on the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger the registration update procedure.
  • the second information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the terminal device whose distance from the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold , the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the processor 1201 is further configured to determine that the current location of the terminal device is the target location when it is determined that the distance between the current location of the terminal device and the first reference location reaches the third distance threshold.
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the processor 1201 is further configured to determine the location of the terminal device determined after receiving the first indication information as the target location.
  • the second information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the processor 1201 is specifically configured to control the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device; and control the NAS of the terminal device to update the first location based on the target location. A reference position to obtain the second reference position.
  • the second information further includes second indication information, and the second indication information is also used to instruct the AS of the terminal device to send the target location to the NAS of the terminal device.
  • the communication device 120 is configured to execute the method of the terminal device in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 8 .
  • the transceiver 1203 in the communication device 120 is configured to receive third information from the core network device through the access network device, and the third information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the core network device to the core network device through the access network device Sending third location information;
  • the transceiver 1203 is also configured to send the third location information to the core network device through the access network device;
  • the processor 1201 is configured to determine registration based on the third location information The trigger condition for the update process.
  • the third location information includes a target location, and the target location is based on the first reference
  • the location and the first distance threshold trigger the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the processor 1201 is specifically configured to determine a second reference location based on the target location, and the second reference location is used to trigger the registration update procedure.
  • the third information includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the target location to the core network device through the access network device, and the target location includes The position of the terminal device determined within the preset time range before being released; the processor 1201 is further configured to, when it is determined that the terminal device needs to be released, determine that the position of the terminal device within the preset time range before being released is the target location.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the position determined by the terminal device after receiving the fourth indication information is the target position; the processor 1201 , is further configured to determine the position of the terminal device determined after receiving the fourth indication information as the target position.
  • FIG. 13 it is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device 130 provided in this embodiment.
  • the core network device in the method embodiment corresponding to the aforementioned FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 may be based on the The structure of the communication device 130 .
  • the communication device 130 may include a processor 1310 , a memory 1320 and a transceiver 1330 . Wherein, the processor 1310 is coupled with the memory 1320 , and the processor 1310 is coupled with the transceiver 1330 .
  • the aforementioned transceiver 1330 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • the device used to realize the receiving function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a receiving unit
  • the device used to realize the sending function in the transceiver unit can be regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and the receiving unit also It can be called receiver, input port, receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit can be called transmitter, transmitter, or transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the foregoing processor 1310 may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), an application-specific integrated circuit (application-specific integrated circuit, ASIC), a programmable logic device (programmable logic device, PLD) or a combination thereof.
  • the aforementioned PLD may be a complex programmable logic device (complex programmable logic device, CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (field-programmable gate array, FPGA), a general array logic (generic array logic, GAL) or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 1310 may refer to one processor, or may include multiple processors, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the aforementioned memory 1320 is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the memory 1320 may exist independently and be connected to the processor 1310 .
  • the memory 1320 may be integrated with the processor 1310, for example, integrated into one or more chips.
  • the memory 1320 can store program codes for executing the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1310 .
  • the memory 1320 may include a volatile memory (volatile memory), such as a random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM); the memory may also include a non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as a read-only memory (read-only memory).
  • memory 1320 can also comprise the storage of above-mentioned kind combination of devices.
  • the storage 1320 may refer to one storage, or may include multiple storages.
  • the memory 1320 is used for storing various data. For example, the first reference position, the first distance threshold.
  • the memory 1320 is also used for storing first rule information, second rule information, third rule information, fourth rule information, and the like. Specifically, please refer to the relevant introduction in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • computer-readable instructions are stored in the memory 1320 , and the computer-readable instructions include a plurality of software modules, for example, a transceiver module 1321 and a processing module 1322 .
  • the processor 1310 may perform corresponding operations according to the instructions of each software module.
  • an operation performed by a software module actually refers to an operation performed by the processor 1310 according to an instruction of the software module.
  • the communication device 130 is configured to execute the method of the core network device in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 or FIG. 7 .
  • the main functions of the transceiver module 1321 and the processing module 1322 in the communication device 130 are as follows:
  • the transceiver module 1321 is configured to receive first information from the core network device, the first information is used to instruct the access network device to send the first location information of the terminal device to the core network device; the processing module 1322 is configured to determine the First location information; the transceiver module 1321 is further configured to send the first location information to the core network device, where the first location information is used by the core network device to determine the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device.
  • the first location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update process is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined.
  • the processing module 1322 is specifically configured to: send second information to the terminal device according to the first information, where the second information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the second information to the access network device.
  • Two position information determine the first position information according to the second position information received from the terminal device, the second position information includes the target position, the target position is the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device based on the second information .
  • the first information includes first rule information
  • the first rule information is used to determine that the target location includes when the distance between the terminal device and the first reference location reaches a third distance threshold The location of the terminal device, the third distance threshold is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the second information includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position;
  • the processing module 1322 is specifically configured to control the transceiver module 1321 to send the second information.
  • the second information includes the first rule information.
  • the first information includes second rule information
  • the second rule information is used to determine that the target location includes the location of each terminal device sent by the terminal device to the access network device;
  • the second information includes the second rule information.
  • the transceiving module 1321 is specifically used to receive the location of each terminal device from the terminal device.
  • the first information includes third rule information
  • the third rule information is used by the access network device to determine that the target location includes a preset time range before releasing or suspending the terminal device The location of the terminal device obtained in .
  • the second information includes first indication information
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the position of the terminal device determined by the terminal device after receiving the first indication information is the target position.
  • the processing module 1322 is specifically configured to control the transceiving module 1321 to send the second information to the terminal device when it is determined according to the third rule information that the terminal device needs to be released or suspended.
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the first information further includes second indication information
  • the second information further includes the second indication information
  • the second indication information is also used to instruct the terminal device's AS to send the terminal device
  • the NAS sends the destination location.
  • the transceiver module 1321 is further configured to receive a first paging message from the core network device, where the first paging message includes the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold;
  • the processing module 1322 is further configured to determine a target cell and/or a target beam coverage area from multiple cells of the access network device based on the second reference position and/or the second distance threshold;
  • the transceiver module 1321 is also configured to It is used for sending the second paging message for paging the terminal device to the target cell and/or the coverage area of the target beam.
  • the target location is represented by geographic location information, and the geographic location information includes latitude and longitude.
  • the processing module 1322 determines the tracking area code TAC corresponding to the first location information according to the first correspondence and the first location information, and the first correspondence is a correspondence between a geographical area and a tracking area code TAC.
  • the communication device 130 is configured to execute the method of the core network device in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 8 .
  • the main functions of the transceiver module 1321 and the processing module 1322 in the communication device 130 are as follows:
  • the transceiver module 1321 is configured to send third information to the terminal device through the access network device providing services for the terminal device, where the third information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the terminal information to the core network device through the access network device.
  • the third location information of the device is further configured to receive the third location information from the terminal device through the access network device;
  • the processing module 1322 is configured to determine the paging of the terminal device based on the third location information Territory and/or Registered Territory.
  • the third location information includes a target location, where the target location is the location of the terminal device obtained before the registration update procedure is triggered based on the first reference location and the first distance threshold.
  • the distance between the target position and the first reference position is smaller than the first distance threshold.
  • the paging area and/or registration area of the terminal device is represented by a second reference position and/or a second distance threshold, and the second reference position and the second distance threshold are based on the first The location information is determined.
  • the second distance threshold is greater than the first distance threshold.
  • the third information includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to send the target location to the core network device through the access network device, and the target location includes The location determined by the terminal device within a preset time range before being released.
  • the third information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device determines that the position determined after receiving the fourth indication information is the target position;
  • the transceiving module 1321 is specifically configured to send the fourth indication information to the terminal device through the access network device when it is determined that the terminal device needs to be released.
  • each step of the above method can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, register.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, no detailed description is given here. It should also be understood that the first, second, third, fourth and various numbers mentioned herein are only for convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the present application provides a computer program product comprising one or more computer instructions.
  • the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • implement the method related to the access network device as shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 .
  • implement the method related to the terminal device as shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 .
  • implement the method related to the core network device as shown in FIG. 2 , FIG. 4 , FIG.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, e.g. (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wirelessly (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be stored by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a digital versatile disc (digital versatile disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)) wait.
  • a magnetic medium for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium for example, a digital versatile disc (digital versatile disc, DVD)
  • a semiconductor medium for example, a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program, and the computer program is executed by a processor to realize 8.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program, and the computer program is executed by a processor to realize 8.
  • the method related to the terminal device in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 is also provided.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program, and the computer program is executed by a processor to realize 8.
  • a method related to the core network device in FIG. 9 or FIG. 10 is also provided.
  • sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种信息更新方法以及通信装置，在该方法中，接入网设备能够感知核心网设备下发的第一信息，并且，能够基于该第一信息确定向核心网设备上报的第一位置信息，该第一位置信息用于确定寻呼区域和/或注册区域。由于接入网设备参与确定了第一位置信息而不再是仅透传终端设备上报的位置信息，因此，有利于确定合适的寻呼区域和/或注册区域，进而有利于降低网络侧(例如，接入网设备或核心网设备)寻呼终端设备的信令开销，也有利于降低注册更新的信令开销。

Description

一种信息更新方法以及通信装置
本申请要求于2022年01月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210111696.X、发明名称为“一种信息更新方法以及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域，尤其涉及一种信息更新方法以及通信装置。
背景技术
当终端设备移出当前所在的注册区域时，终端设备需要触发注册更新流程向核心网上报该终端设备当前的位置，以使得核心网能够获知该终端设备的位置变化，并为该终端设备配置新的寻呼区域或者注册区域，以便于后续对该终端设备进行寻呼管理以及业务处理(例如，收费策略的选择、切换管理)等。
然而，终端设备只有触发了注册更新流程之后，才会给核心网上报该终端设备的位置信息，导致核心网不能及时根据终端设备的位置信息更新该终端设备的寻呼区域或者注册区域。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种信息更新方法以及通信装置。
第一方面，本申请提供了一种信息更新方法，该方法涉及接入网设备和核心网设备。在该方法中，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第一信息，该第一信息用于指示该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送终端设备的第一位置信息。然后，该接入网设备基于第一信息确定该第一位置信息。然后，该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该第一位置信息，该第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
应理解，该第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域，可以理解为，该核心网设备基于第一位置信息确定终端设备的注册区域，和/或，寻呼终端设备的区域。
本申请中，由于，接入网设备能够根据核心网设备的指示向核心网设备上报由该接入网设备确定的终端设备的位置信息，核心网设备无需等待终端设备发起注册更新流程，就能够及时获取终端设备的位置信息并用于确定该终端设备的寻呼区域或注册区域，提高了对终端设备进行寻呼管理和/或注册管理的及时性与准确性。此外，由于核心网设备可以不通过注册更新流程就获取到终端设备的位置信息，而终端设备无需发起不必要的注册更新流程来上报位置信息，有利于节省终端设备因触发注册更新流程而导致的信令开销。
可选地，本申请适用于卫星通信场景。可选地，前述接入网设备为卫星。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
其中，该第一参考位置和该第一距离门限为核心网设备为终端设备配置的用于触发注册 更新流程的参数。示例性的，在该核心网设备向该接入网设备发送第一信息之前，该核心网设备已为终端设备配置了前述第一参考位置和第一距离门限。当该终端设备所在的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限，则该终端设备触发注册更新流程。该注册更新流程包括该终端设备采用该终端设备当前的位置更新第一参考位置，以及，该终端设备通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送该终端设备当前的位置，以使得该核心网设备采用该终端设备当前的位置更新第一参考位置。
本实施方式中，接入网设备能够基于来自核心网设备的第一信息在终端设备触发注册更新流程之前确定目标位置，并将该目标位置以第一位置信息的形式发送给核心网设备，以使得该核心网设备能够基于收到的目标位置确定寻呼区域和/或注册区域。由于，该目标位置是终端设备在按照原有配置的第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前确定的，核心网设备可以在注册更新流程发起前就获取到终端设备的目标位置，以使得核心网设备在终端设备触发注册更新流程之前就基于目标位置确定了新的注册区域，而导致由第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定的旧的注册区域失效，因此，终端设备不再基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程，有利于节省终端设备基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销。此外，由于终端设备的目标位置能够在触发注册更新流程之前就及时地上报给核心网设备，有利于核心网设备准确且及时地获知终端设备当前所在的位置，因此，有利于核心网设备确定更精准的寻呼区域和/或注册区域，进而有利于核心网设备更精准地对终端设备进行寻呼管理和/或注册管理。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
本实施方式中，提出接入网设备向核心网设备发送的第一位置信息指示的目标位置满足的特征，即目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。由于，按照核心网设备已配置的注册更新规则，终端设备所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限时，该终端设备才会触发注册更新流程。然而，本实施方式确定的目标位置与第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限，也就是说，还没有达到触发注册更新流程的条件。因此，接入网设备将该目标位置上报给核心网设备不仅终端设备不会触发注册更新流程，还能够向该核心网设备提供终端设备的位置。因此，不仅有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，还有利于核心网设备及时获得目标位置并基于目标位置确定寻呼区域和/或注册区域。因此，有利于核心网设备确定更精准的寻呼区域和/或注册区域，进而有利于核心网设备更精准地对终端设备进行寻呼管理和/或注册管理。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。也可以理解为，该核心网设备能够基于第一位置信息确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限，然后，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定终端设备寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施方式中，由于，该注册区域和/或寻呼区域是以用于触发注册更新流程的参数的形式表示的，而不是基于跟踪区域码(tracking area code，TAC)表示的，因此，不仅能够与基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制兼容，还能够提高表示注册区域和/或寻呼区域的灵活性。
可选的，第二参考位置是基于第一位置信息更新第一参考位置而获得的。
可选的，第二距离门限是基于第一位置信息更新第一距离门限而获得的。
此外，由于，该第一位置信息是在按照原有配置的第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前确定的，该在基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前便更新了注册区域，即不再基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程。因此，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，降低信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该接入网设备确定该第一位置信息，包括：该接入网设备根据该第一信息向该终端设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息；该接入网设备从该终端设备接收该第二位置信息，该第二位置信息包括该目标位置，该目标位置为该终端设备基于该第二信息确定的该终端设备的位置；该接入网设备根据第二位置信息确定该第一位置信息。
本实施方式中，接入网设备能够基于收到的第一信息确定需要发送给终端设备的第二信息，以使得该终端设备基于收到的第二信息确定目标位置以及在第二信息指示的时机向接入网设备上报该终端设备的目标位置。有利于使得终端设备与接入网设备对目标位置的理解一致，避免终端设备触发不必要的注册更新流程，避免造成信令浪费。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。示例性的，该第三距离门限可以是后文具体实施部分介绍的距离门限A。
应注意，在本实施方式的一种示例中，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备或接入网设备，即第一规则信息能够指明决策终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限的设备是终端设备或接入网设备。例如，该第一规则信息用于指示接入网设备确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。又例如，该第一规则信息用于指示终端设备确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
在本示例中，由于，第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体，即核心网设备在发送第一规则信息之前已确定由终端设备或接入网设备判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则。因此，该核心网设备能够明确获知获取目标位置的决策主体(即是由接入网设备决策终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则，还是终端设备决策是否满足第一规则)，有利于核心网设备基于不同的决策主体调整第三距离门限的取值。此外，有利于降低终端设备和接入网设备的实现复杂度。
此外，在本实施方式的另一种示例中，该第一规则信息还可以不指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备或接入网设备，而是交给接入网设备实现。也就是说，由接入网设备在收到第一规则信息之后基于当前网络质量等因素确定是由该接入网设备作为决策主体，即接入网设备自己判断终端设备当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限；或者，由终端设备作为决策主体，即将第一规则信息发送给终端设备，由该终端设备判断终端设备当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限。
在本示例中，由于，第一规则信息仅明确了第一规则(即当终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时，确定该终端设备的位置为目标位置)，而没有限定判断第一规则的决策主体。因此，接入网设备能够基于网络质量等因素确定获取目标位置的决策主体，有利于提高接入网设备上报目标位置的灵活性。
在一种可能的实施方式中，由接入网设备作为判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体，此时，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。具体地，该接入网设备能够获得终端设备当前的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离，当该接入网设备根据该第一规则信息确定该终端设备的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，该接入网设备向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
本实施方式中，由接入网设备基于第一规则信息确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限，并且，该接入网设备能够在确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时向终端设备发送第一指示信息。于是，该终端设备仅需要根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，而不要求终端设备判断该终端设备相比于第一参考位置之间的距离。因此，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度，也有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中，由终端设备作为判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体，此时，该第二信息包括该第一规则信息。
本实施方式中，接入网设备能够将第一规则信息发送给终端设备，由终端设备在与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时，确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置，并向该接入网设备发送该目标位置。由于，终端设备相比于接入网设备更容易确定该终端设备自己的位置，因此，有利于提高终端设备向接入网设备发送的目标位置的准确性，进而有利于提高接入网设备向核心网设备发送的目标位置的准确性。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置；该第二信息包括该第二规则信息。此时，该接入网设备从该终端设备接收每个该终端设备的位置，并且，确定从该终端设备接收的该终端设备的每个位置为目标位置。
本实施方式中，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二规则信息，以使得该接入网设备获知从终端设备收到的该终端设备的每个位置为目标位置。接入网设备向终端设备发送第二规则信息，以使得该终端设备能够获知该终端设备每次确定的位置均为目标位置，并均需要发送给该接入网设备。有利于使得终端设备和接入网设备对目标位置的理解一致。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第三规则信息，该第三规则信息用于该接入网设备确定该目标位置包括在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的该终端设备的位置。此时，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。具体地，当该接入网设备根据该第三规则信息确定该终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时，该接入网设备向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
本实施方式中，由于，该终端设备在进入非连接态(例如，非激活态或空闲态)之前， 能够在接入网设备的第一指示信息的指示下将该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置上报给核心网设备，因此，核心网设备能够获知终端设备在进入非连接态之前的地理位置。有利于核心网设备在需要对终端设备进行寻呼管理时，能够更精准地确定终端设备的寻呼区域，以降低由寻呼造成的信令开销。此外，由于核心网设备还会基于指示目标位置的第一指示信息更新注册区域，因此，终端设备在进入非连接态之后的短时间内不会因为需要触发注册更新流程而重回连接态，有利于避免终端设备在在连接态和非连接态之间频繁转换，进而有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
本实施方式中，提出第一位置信息还用于核心网设备确定第二距离门限，并且，该第二距离门限大于第一距离门限。由于，第二距离门限大于第一距离门限，基于第二距离门限确定的注册区域比基于第一距离门限确定的注册区域更大，因此，终端设备不容易触发注册更新流程，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新流程的频率，延长终端设备触发注册更新流程的周期。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二信息还包括该第二指示信息，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的接入层(access stratum，AS)向该终端设备的非接入层(non-access stratum，NAS)发送该目标位置。
传统技术中，终端设备的NAS可以通过全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)或全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)等能够获取位置信息的模块获取该终端设备当前的位置，因此，终端设备的AS不会主动向终端设备的NAS发送终端设备的位置。而本实施方式中，终端设备的AS能够基于第二指示信息将获取位置信息发送给终端设备的NAS，而不是终端设备的NAS获取终端设备的位置信息，以使得终端设备的AS具备向接入网设备发送终端设备的位置信息的能力，进而使得终端设备的NAS从终端设备的AS获得的目标位置与接入网设备从终端设备的AS获得的目标位置保持一致，进而使得核心网设备获得的目标位置与终端设备的NAS获得的目标位置保持一致。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该第一位置信息之后，该方法还包括：该接入网设备从该核心网设备接收第一寻呼消息，该第一寻呼消息包括该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限；然后，该接入网设备基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限从该接入网设备的多个小区中确定目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域；该接入网设备向该目标小区和/或该目标波束覆盖区域发送用于寻呼该终端设备的第二寻呼消息。
其中，该接入网设备下可以有多个小区，该接入网设备可以基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从多个小区中选择一个或多个小区作为目标小区。示例性的，该目标接入网设备可以选择靠近第二参考位置的小区作为目标小区。可选地，该目标接入网设备还可以从一个或多个小区中选择一个或多个波束覆盖区域。示例性的，目标接入网设备可以选择靠近第二参考位置的波束覆盖区域为目标波束覆盖区域。
本实施例中，接入网设备能够基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从多个小区中筛选出目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域。因此，接入网设备可以在较小范围内寻呼终端设备，因此，能够减少用于寻呼的信令开销，节约空口资源，提高系统性能。
第二方面，本申请提供了一种信息更新方法，在该方法中，终端设备接收来自接入网设 备的第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息；然后，该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该第二位置信息，以及，该终端设备基于该第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
其中，第二位置信息用于接入网设备确定第一位置信息。
应理解，该终端设备可以先向接入网设备发送第二位置信息，再基于第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件；也可以先基于第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件，再向接入网设备发送第二位置信息；该终端设备还可以基于第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件的同时向接入网设备发送第二位置信息。具体此处不做限定。
本申请中，由于终端设备能够基于接入网设备确定的第二信息确定第二位置信息，然后，将该第二位置信息发送给接入网设备且基于该第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。因此，有利于使得终端设备与接入网设备对第二位置信息的理解一致，进而有利于避免终端设备触发不必要的注册更新流程来上报位置信息，节省了信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
其中，该第一参考位置和该第一距离门限为核心网设备为终端设备配置的用于触发注册更新流程的参数。示例性的，在终端设备收到来自接入网设备的第二信息之前，该核心网设备已为终端设备配置了前述第一参考位置和第一距离门限。因此，当该终端设备所在的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限，则该终端设备触发注册更新流程。该注册更新流程包括该终端设备采用该终端设备当前的位置更新第一参考位置，以及，该终端设备通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送该终端设备当前的位置，以使得该核心网设备采用该终端设备当前的位置更新第一参考位置。
本实施方式中，终端设备能够基于在触发注册更新流程之前确定目标位置，并基于指示该目标位置的第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。也可以理解为，该终端设备在触发注册更新流程之前便修改了注册更新流程的触发条件，以至于该终端设备不会再按照原有的注册更新参数(即第一参考位置和第一距离门限)触发注册更新。因此，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，降低注册更新的信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
本实施方式中，提出终端设备确定的第二位置信息指示的目标位置满足的特征，即目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。由于，按照核心网设备已配置的注册更新规则，终端设备所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限时，该终端设备才会触发注册更新流程。然而，本实施方式确定的目标位置与第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限，也就是说，还没有达到触发注册更新流程的条件，终端设备不会触发注册更新流程。因此，利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，节省因注册更新流程而导致的信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备基于该第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件，包括：该终端设备基于该目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发该注册更新流程。
其中，第二参考位置用于更新第一参考位置。
示例性的，该终端设备直接采用该第二参考位置替换第一参考位置。
本实施方式中，由于终端设备能够基于第二位置信息指示的目标位置将第一参考位置更新为第二参考位置，进而能够基于第二参考位置限触发注册更新，而不再基于第一参考位置触发注册更新。由于，该第二位置信息是终端设备在按照原有配置的第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前确定的，因此，可以延长终端设备触发注册更新流程的周期，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，降低信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。当该终端设备当前的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，该终端设备确定该终端设备当前的位置为该目标位置。
本实施方式中，接入网设备能够将第一规则信息发送给终端设备，由终端设备在与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时，确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置，并向该接入网设备发送该目标位置。由于，终端设备相比于接入网设备更容易确定该终端设备自己的位置，因此，有利于提高终端设备向接入网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性，进而有利于提高接入网设备向核心网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。此时，该终端设备将在收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置确定为该目标位置。
本实施方式中，该终端设备仅根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，而不要求终端设备判断该终端设备相比于第一参考位置之间的距离，也不要求终端设备确定该终端设备是否需要被释放或挂起。因此，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度，也有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置。
本实施方式中，该接入网设备将前述第二规则信息发送给终端设备，有利于该终端设备获知该接入网设备会将该终端设备每次上报给接入网设备的位置均确定为目标位置，有利于使得终端设备和接入网设备对目标位置的理解一致，进而有利于终端设备避免触发不必要的注册更新流程，进而节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备基于该目标位置确定第二参考位置，包括：该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置；该终端设备的NAS基于该目标位置更新该第一参考位置，得到该第二参考位置。
应注意，在实际实现中，该终端设备的AS可以是基于第二指示信息的指示才向该终端设备的NAS发送目标位置，也可以由协议规定该终端设备的AS能够将收到的目标位置发送给该终端设备的NAS。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
需要说明的是，本方面的部分具体实施方式和有益效果与前文第一方面中的部分实施方 式类似，具体可参见第一方面的具体实施方式和其有益效果，在此不再赘述。
第三方面，本申请提供了一种信息更新方法，在该方法中，核心网设备向为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备发送第一信息，该第一信息用于指示该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该终端设备的第一位置信息。然后，该核心网设备从该接入网设备接收该第一位置信息。然后，该核心网络设备基于该第一位置信息确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施例中，由于核心网设备能够指示接入网设备基于第一信息向该核心网设备上报第一位置信息，因此，该核心网设备可以不依赖于终端设备触发的注册更新流程而获得终端设备的位置信息(例如，第一位置信息)。有利于核心网设备及时进而获取终端设备的位置信息并用于确定该终端设备的寻呼区域或注册区域，提高了对终端设备进行寻呼管理和/或注册管理的及时性与准确性。此外，核心网设备能够基于该第一位置信息确定合适的注册区域，以使得终端设备能够在核心网设备确定的注册区域内不触发注册更新，因此，有利于降低通过注册更新来上报终端设备的位置而产生的信令开销。此外，有利于核心网设备基于接入网设备上报的第一位置信息确定合适的寻呼区域，以使得降低网络侧(例如，接入网设备或核心网设备)寻呼终端设备的信令开销，也有利于降低注册更新的信令开销。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
其中，该第一参考位置和该第一距离门限为已配置的用于触发注册更新流程的参数。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。
具体地，该核心网设备基于第一位置信息确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限，然后，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第二距离门限确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施例中，该核心网设备可以仅基于目标位置确定第二参考位置，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置而获得第二参考位置；该核心网设备也可以基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置同时更新第一参考位置和第一距离门限而获得第二参考位置和第二距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第三规则信息，该第三规则信息用于该接入网设备确定该目标位置包括在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该方法还包括：该核心网设备基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限确定用于寻呼该终端设备的目标接入网设备；该核心网设备向该目标接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息，该第一寻呼消息包括该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限用于确定第一地理区域；该核心网设备基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限确定用于寻呼该终端设备的目标接入网设备，包括：该核心网设备确定位于该第一地理区域内的接入网设备为该目标接入网设备。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，若核心网设备基于目标位置仅确定了第二参考位置，即该核心网设备仅更新了将第一参考位置更新为第二参考位置而没有更新第一距离门限，此时，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第一距离门限确定第一地理区域。例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为圆心且第一距离门限为半径的圆形区域为前述第一地理区域。又例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第一距离门限为该几何中心到该矩形的边的矩形区域为前述第一地理区域。
在本实施方式的另一种实现中，若核心网设备基于目标位置确定了第二参考位置和第二距离门限，即该核心网设将第一距离门限更新为第二距离门限且将第一参考位置更新为第二参考位置，此时，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第二距离门限确定第一地理区域。例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为圆心且第二距离门限为半径的圆形区域为前述第一地理区域。又例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第二距离门限为该几何中心到该矩形的边的矩形区域为前述第一地理区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限中的至少一项以及位置变化信息用于确定第二地理区域，该位置变化信息包括指示该终端设备的移动方向的信息和/或指示该终端设备的移动速度的信息；该核心网设备基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限确定用于寻呼该终端设备的目标接入网设备，包括：该核心网设备确定位于该第二地理区域内的接入网设备为该目标接入网设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置采用地理位置信息表示。该核心网设备从该接入网设备接收该第一位置信息之后，该方法还包括：该核心网设备根据第一对应关系和该第一位置信息确定该第一位置信息对应的跟踪区域码TAC，其中，该第一对应关系为地理区域与TAC之间的对应关系。
其中，第一位置信息可以由地理位置信息表示，该地理位置信息可以是经纬度、行政区域或者国家区域等。该地理区域可以由经纬度、行政区域或者国家区域等地理位置信息表示。此外，地理区域还可以由基于经纬度划分的网格表示。例如，经度每隔5°且纬度每隔5°确定的网格。核心网设备在收到指示目标位置的第一位置信息之后，能够确定该目标位置所在的地理区域，进一步地，该核心网设备基于第一对应关系能够确定该地理区域对应的TAC。因此，该核心网设备能够基于第一位置信息确定该第一位置信息对应的TAC。
本实施方式中，核心网设备能够将采用经纬度等地理位置信息表示的目标位置转换为TAC，以使得核心网设备内部的基于TAC实现的某些策略能够与基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制衔接。有利于提高基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制与传统技术中基于TAC的注册更新机制的兼容性，以使得系统平稳运行。
需要说明的是，本方面的部分具体实施方式和有益效果与前文第一方面中的部分实施方 式类似，具体可参见第一方面的具体实施方式和其有益效果，在此不再赘述。
第四方面，本申请提供了一种信息更新方法，该方法中接入网设备不感知终端设备与核心网设备之间传输的消息的内容，该接入网设备仅起到透传的作用。在该方法中，终端设备通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收第三信息，该第三信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送第三位置信息；该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该第三位置信息，以及，该终端设备基于该第三位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备基于该第三位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件，包括：该终端设备基于该目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发该注册更新流程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该目标位置，该目标位置包括该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置。当该终端设备确定需要被释放时，该终端设备确定在被释放之前的预设时间范围内的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
本实施例中，核心网设备指示终端设备在被释放之前通过接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，有利于该核心网设备及时获知终端设备的位置，进而有利于核心网设备对终端设备进行注册区域管理或寻呼区域管理。此外，由于该终端设备在进入非连接态(例如，非激活态或空闲态)之前，该终端设备根据第三指示信息将向该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置上报给核心网设备，因此，核心网设备能够获知终端设备在进入非连接态之前的地理位置。有利于核心网设备在需要对终端设备进行寻呼管理时，能够更精准地确定终端设备的寻呼区域，以降低由寻呼造成的信令开销。此外，由于核心网设备还会基于指示目标位置的第一指示信息更新注册区域，因此，终端设备在进入非连接态之后的短时间内不会因为需要触发注册更新流程而重回连接态，有利于避免终端设备在在连接态和非连接态之间频繁转换，进而有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为该目标位置。该终端设备将在收到该第四指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置确定为该目标位置。
本实施方式中，由于终端设备在连接态时，核心网设备能够与终端设备的NAS进行通信，因此，该核心网设备能够感知该终端设备是否将要被释放。本实施方式中，该终端设备仅在收到第四指示信息后获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度。
需要说明的是，本方面的具体实施方式和有益效果与前文第一方面中的部分实施方式类似，具体可参见第一方面的具体实施方式和其有益效果，在此不再赘述。
第五方面，本申请提供了一种信息更新方法，该方法中接入网设备不感知终端设备与核心网设备之间传输的消息的内容，该接入网设备仅起到透传的作用。在该方法中，核心网设 备通过为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备向该终端设备发送第三信息，该第三信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该终端设备的第三位置信息；该核心网设备通过该接入网设备从该终端设备接收该第三位置信息；该核心网络设备基于该第三位置信息确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该目标位置，该目标位置包括该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置。
本实施例中，核心网设备指示终端设备在被释放之前通过接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，有利于该核心网设备获知终端设备的位置。有利于核心网设备对终端设备进行注册区域管理或寻呼区域管理。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为该目标位置；该核心网设备通过为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备向该终端设备发送第三信息，包括：当该核心网设备确定该终端设备需要被释放时，该核心网设备通过该接入网设备向该终端设备发送该第四指示信息。
本实施方式中，由于终端设备在连接态时，核心网设备能够与终端设备的NAS进行通信，因此，该核心网设备能够感知该终端设备是否将要被释放。本实施方式中，该终端设备仅在收到第四指示信息后获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度。
需要说明的是，本方面的具体实施方式和有益效果与前文第四方面中的部分实施方式类似，具体可参见第四方面的具体实施方式和其有益效果，在此不再赘述。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是前述实施方式中的接入网设备，也可以是该接入网设备内的芯片。该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。当该通信装置是接入网设备时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是收发器；该接入网设备还可以包括存储模块，该存储模块可以是存储器；该存储模块用于存储指令，该处理模块执行该存储模块所存储的指令，以使该接入网设备执行第一方面或第一方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。当该通信装置是接入网设备内的芯片时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等；该处理模块执行存储模块所存储的指令，以使该接入网设备执行第一方面或第一方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。该存储模块可以是该芯片内的存储模块(例如，寄存器、缓存等)，也可以是该接入网设备内的位于该芯片外部的存储模块(例如，只读存储器、随机存取存储器等)。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是前述实施方式中的终 端设备，也可以是该终端设备内的芯片。该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。当该通信装置是终端设备时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是收发器；该终端设备还可以包括存储模块，该存储模块可以是存储器；该存储模块用于存储指令，该处理模块执行该存储模块所存储的指令，以使该终端设备执行第二方面或第二方面的任一种实施方式中的方法；或者，执行第四方面或第四方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。当该通信装置是终端设备内的芯片时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等；该处理模块执行存储模块所存储的指令，以使该终端设备执行第二方面或第二方面的任一种实施方式中的方法；或者，执行第四方面或第四方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。该存储模块可以是该芯片内的存储模块(例如，寄存器、缓存等)，也可以是该终端设备内的位于该芯片外部的存储模块(例如，只读存储器、随机存取存储器等)。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是前述实施方式中的核心网设备，也可以是该核心网设备内的芯片。该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。当该通信装置是核心网设备时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是收发器；该核心网设备还可以包括存储模块，该存储模块可以是存储器；该存储模块用于存储指令，该处理模块执行该存储模块所存储的指令，以使该核心网设备执行第三方面或第三方面的任一种实施方式中的方法；或者，执行第五方面或第五方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。当该通信装置是核心网设备内的芯片时，该处理模块可以是处理器，该收发模块可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等；该处理模块执行存储模块所存储的指令，以使该核心网设备执行第三方面或第三方面的任一种实施方式中的方法；或者，执行第五方面或第五方面的任一种实施方式中的方法。该存储模块可以是该芯片内的存储模块(例如，寄存器、缓存等)，也可以是该核心网设备内的位于该芯片外部的存储模块(例如，只读存储器、随机存取存储器等)。
第九方面，本申请提供了一种通信装置，该装置可以是集成电路芯片。该集成电路芯片包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，该存储器用于存储程序或指令，当该程序或指令被该处理器执行时，使得该通信装置执行如前述各个方面的中的任一种实施方式所介绍的方法。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行如前述各个方面中的任一种实施方式所介绍的方法。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当该指令在计算机上运行时，以使得计算机执行如前各个方面中的任一种实施方式所介绍的方法。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，该通信系统包括执行前述第一方面以及第一方面的任一种实施方式中的接入网设备，执行前述第二方面以及第二方面的任一种实施方式中的终端设备，以及，执行前述第三方面以及第三方面的任一种实施方式中的核心网设备。或者，该通信系统包括执行前述第四方面以及第四方面的任一种实施方式中的终端设备；以及，执行前述第五方面以及第五方面的任一种实施方式中的核心网设备。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例。
图1A为本申请提出的信息更新方法适用的一个网络架构图；
图1B为本申请提出的信息更新方法适用的另一个网络架构图；
图1C为本申请提出的信息更新方法适用的另一个网络架构图；
图2为本申请中信息更新方法的一个流程图；
图3A为传统技术中触发注册更新流程的一个场景示例图；
图3B为本申请中触发注册更新流程的一个场景示例图；
图4为本申请中信息更新方法的另一个流程图；
图5为本申请中信息更新方法的另一个流程图；
图6为本申请中信息更新方法的另一个流程图；
图7为本申请中信息更新方法的另一个流程图；
图8为本申请中信息更新方法的另一个流程图；
图9为本申请中寻呼方法的一个流程图；
图10为本申请中移动限制信息处理方法的一个流程图；
图11为本申请中通信装置的一个实施例示意图；
图12为本申请中通信装置的另一个实施例示意图；
图13为本申请中通信装置的另一个实施例示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。
本申请的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象，而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换，以便这里描述的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的内容以外的顺序实施。此外，术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形，意图在于覆盖不排他的包含，例如，包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元，而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。
为便于理解，下面先对本申请提出的信息更新方法的系统架构和应用场景进行介绍：
本申请提出的信息更新方法可以应用于5G NR(5G New Radio)系统、第六代的移动信息技术(the 6th generation mobile communication technology，6G)系统以及后续演进制式中，本申请对此不作限定。该通信系统至少包括终端设备、接入网设备和核心网设备。
其中，终端设备，包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。例如，可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与核心网(例如，5G核心网(5th generationcore，5GC))进行通信，可以与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备也可以被称为终端(Terminal)、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)设备、用户单元(subscriber unit)、用户站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station，MS)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point，AP)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用 户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。此外，该终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self-driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。应理解，本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。本申请中的终端设备可以是上述任意一种设备或芯片，具体此处不做限定。无论作为设备还是作为芯片，该终端设备都可以作为独立的产品进行制造、销售或者使用。在本实施例以及后续实施例中，以终端设备为例进行介绍。
接入网设备，可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以用于负责空中接口相关的功能，例如，无线链路维护功能、无线资源管理功能、部分移动性管理功能。此外，该接入网设备还可以配置有基带单元(base band unit，BBU)，具备基带信号处理功能。示例性的，接入网设备可以是当前为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备(radio access network，RAN)。目前，接入网设备的一些常见示例为：节点B(Node B，NB)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、5G新无线(new radio，NR)系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)、6G系统中的节点(例如，xNodeB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，家庭演进节点(home evolved NodeB)或家庭节点(home Node B，HNB))等。此外，在云接入网(cloud radio access network，CloudRAN)或开放式接入网(open radio access network，ORAN)等网络结构中，接入网设备可以是包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)(也被称为控制单元)和/或分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)的设备。其中，包括CU和DU的RAN设备将NR系统中gNB的协议层拆分开，部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制，剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中，由CU集中控制DU。应理解，本申请实施例中的接入网设备可以是上述任意一种设备或上述设备中的芯片，具体此处不做限定。无论作为设备还是作为芯片，该接入网设备都可以作为独立的产品进行制造、销售或者使用。在本实施例以及后续实施例中，以接入网设备为例进行介绍。
核心网设备，是指为终端设备提供业务支持的核心网(core network，CN)中的设备。目前，核心网设备的一些常见示例为：接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)实体、会话管理功能(session management function，SMF)实体、用户面功能(user plane function，UPF)实体等等，此处不一一列举。其中，AMF实体可以负责终端设备的接入管理和移动性管理；SMF实体可以负责会话管理，如用户的会话建立等；UPF实体可以是用户面的功能实体，主要负责连接外部网络。需要说明的是，本申请中实体也可以称为网元或功能实体。例如，AMF实体也可以称为AMF网元或AMF功能实体；又例如，SMF实体也可以称为SMF网元或SMF功能实体等。应注意，本申请中的核心网设备至少包括AMF实体。
示例性的，本申请提出的信息更新方法可以应用于非陆地网络(non-terrestrialnetwork，NTN)架构中。例如，3GPP TR38.821中定义的基于NG-RAN架构的非陆地网络(NTN-based NG-RAN architectures)。此时，前述接入网设备中的部分或全部的功能可以通过卫星实现。下面将分别对几种常见的示例进行介绍：
如图1A所示，为基于透传卫星的RAN架构(RAN architecture with transparent satellite)的一种示例。其中，地面的基站(例如，地面的gNB)作为接入网设备；卫星作为远程无线单元(remote radiounit，RRU)(也被称为L1 relay或L1中继)，具备无线频率变频(frequency conversion)和频率放大(frequencyamplification)等功能，用于实现中继透传；NTN网关用于转发来自卫星的信号或来自接入网设备的信号。在该网络结构中，终端设备通过卫星中继透传以及NTN网关转发向接入网设备发送NR Uu无线接口信号。地面接入网设备收到信号后，与地面的核心网设备按照传统技术中的陆地网络技术进行通信。类似的，当核心网设备向终端设备发信号时，地面的基站(例如，地面的gNB)也作为接入网设备，卫星也用于实现信号中继透传。具体与前述过程类似，此处不予赘述。
如图1B所示，为基于再生卫星(regenerative satellite)的RAN架构的一种示例。其中，该卫星作为接入网设备，用于实现从地面接收的信号的再生。在该网络结构中，地面终端设备通过与卫星间的服务链路(service link)向接入网设备(即卫星)发送NR Uu无线接口信号。卫星作为接入网设备从终端设备接收NR Uu无线接口信号，并将收到的信号解析处理为NG接口信号。然后，卫星通过馈电链路(feeder link)上的卫星无线接口(satelliteradio interface，SRI)发给地面的NTN网关，以使得地面的NTN网关将信号转发给地面的核心网设备。类似的，当核心网设备向终端设备发信号时，卫星也用于实现接入网设备的功能。具体与前述过程类似，此处不予赘述。
如图1C所示，为基于再生卫星(regenerative satellite)的RAN架构的另一种示例。其中，卫星作为接入网设备的DU，而地面基站(例如，gNB-CU)作为接入网设备的CU。在该网络结构中，地面终端设备通过与卫星之间的服务链路(service link)向接入网设备的DU(即卫星)发送NR Uu无线接口信号。接入网设备的DU(即卫星)接收并解析来自终端设备的NR-Uu无线接口信号，形成F1无线接口信号。然后，接入网设备的DU通过馈电链路(feeder link)上的卫星无线接口(satellite radio interface，SRI)发给地面的NTN网关，以使得地面的NTN网关将信号转发给地面的接入网设备的CU。然后，地面的接入网设备的CU收到信号后，与地面的核心网设备按照传统技术中的陆地网络技术通信。类似的，当核心网设备向终端设备发信号时，卫星也作为接入网设备的DU，地面基站也作为接入网设备的CU，具体与前述过程类似，此处不予赘述。
应理解，前述图1A、图1B以及图1C所示示例中的地面基站除了可以采用gNB实现之外，还可以采用其他网络制式的基站实现，例如，演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、6G系统中的节点(例如，xNodeB)等，具体此处不做限定。此处仅是对几种常见NTN架构进行介绍，本发明还可以运用于其他NTN架构，在此不做限定。
目前，提出了一种用于NTN系统的注册更新机制。该注册更新机制定义了参考位置和距离门限，并且，要求当终端设备所在的位置与该参考位置之间的距离达到该距离门限时，该终端设备触发注册更新流程。具体地，该终端设备的NAS获取终端设备的位置信息，并通过 注册请求(Registration Request)消息向接入网设备(例如，图1A中的地面基站、图1B中的卫星以及图1C中的卫星和地面基站)发送终端设备的位置信息。该接入网设备收到注册请求消息之后，仅向核心网设备透传前述注册请求消息，而不感知注册请求消息的内容。该机制要求终端设备通过特定的消息(例如，注册请求消息)才能向核心网设备上报终端设备的位置信息，导致终端设备基于其他因素向接入网设备上报的该终端设备的信息仅能够用于接入网设备进行其他处理，无法通过接入网设备上报给核心网设备。例如，该终端设备可能需要等到该终端设备的位置与参考位置之间的距离达到前述距离门限时才能发起注册更新流程，才能将该终端设备的位置上报给核心网设备。
由此可见，前述机制可能导致核心网设备无法及时获得终端设备的位置，而终端设备也需要触发不必要的注册更新流程才能向核心网设备上报位置。此外，该注册更新流程中的消息(例如，注册请求消息)不仅携带了终端设备的位置信息还需要携带其他的信息，导致增加了信令开销。
对此，本申请提出了一种信息更新方法，在沿用基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制的情况下，能够使接入网设备参与确定上报给核心网设备的终端设备的位置，而不是仅透传终端设备上报的位置。不仅能够使核心网设备基于自身需求及时获得终端设备的位置，还能够使核心网设备基于接入网设备上报的终端设备的位置进行注册区域管理和/或寻呼区域管理。
下面将结合图2对本申请提出的信息更新方法的主要流程进行介绍。该方法涉及的核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备可以适用于如图1A、图1B以及图1C中任意一种示例所示的NTN。在任意一种示例所介绍的NTN中，当核心网设备通过接入网设备为终端设备配置了基于参考位置和距离门限触发注册更新的参数之后，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤201，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第一信息；相应地，接入网设备从核心网设备接收第一信息。
其中，该第一信息用于指示接入网设备向核心网设备发送终端设备的第一位置信息，该第一位置信息用于指示接入网设备向核心网设备上报终端设备的目标位置。具体地，该第一信息可以是规则信息，用于确定该接入网设备向核心网设备上报第一位置信息的规则。也就是说，当该接入网设备收到前述第一信息之后，该接入网设备能够基于该第一信息确定如何获得前述目标位置，以及如何将指示前述目标位置的第一位置信息上报给该核心网设备。其中，该第一位置信息可以用地理位置信息表示，即采用地理位置信息指示目标位置。该地理位置信息可以是经纬度、国家区域、行政区域或街道地址等，也可以是基于经纬度划分的网格。例如，经度每隔5°且纬度每隔5°确定的网格。
可选地，该第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。其中，寻呼区域指核心网设备用于寻呼终端设备的区域。该寻呼区域中可以有一个或多个接入网设备。该核心网设备可以通过该寻呼区域中的接入网设备寻呼前述终端设备。此外，注册区域指终端设备在核心网注册的区域，当终端设备离开注册区域时终端设备触发注册更新流程。可选地，该寻呼区域与该注册区域可以是同一个区域。可选的，寻呼区域与该注册区域 可以是不同区域，例如，寻呼区域包括注册区域且比注册区域范围大。
具体地，前述目标位置为终端设备通过第二信息确定的位置，该位置用于终端设备确定注册更新流程的触发条件。具体地，终端设备通过第二信息确定目标位置的处理过程的介绍请参阅后文步骤203。具体地，终端设备基于目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件的处理过程的介绍请参阅后文步骤204。
具体地，该目标位置可以是终端设备在某个特定的时间范围内获得的该终端设备的地理位置，也可以是该终端设备移动到某个空间范围时该终端设备当前的地理位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。可以理解为，该目标位置是在某个特定的时刻之前的终端设备的位置，该特定的时刻为触发注册更新流程这一时刻。也就是说，该目标位置为终端设备基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程的这一特定时刻之前该终端设备的位置。
应注意，该第一参考位置和该第一距离门限为核心网设备为终端设备配置的用于触发注册更新流程的参数。示例性的，核心网设备可以在执行步骤201之前，该核心网设备可以通过接入网设备向该终端设备发送注册更新规则信息，该注册更新规则信息包括用于触发注册更新流程的参数(例如，第一参考位置和第一距离门限等)。该终端设备将在满足触发条件时基于前述第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程。具体地，当该终端设备的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限时，该终端设备便触发注册更新流程。
应注意，本申请涉及的参考位置(例如，第一参考位置)和距离门限(例如，第一距离门限)确定的区域，可以理解为是一个圆形，例如，以参考位置为圆心且以距离门限为半径的圆形；也可以是一个矩形，例如，以参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以距离门限为前述几何中心到矩形的边的矩形；还可以是其他形状的区域。在本申请中，以参考位置和距离门限确定的区域为圆形为例进行介绍。
为便于理解，以图3A为例，核心网设备为终端设备配置的注册更新规则包括第一参考位置(即O点)和第一距离门限(R1)。当该终端设备在以O点(即第一参考位置)为圆心R1(即第一距离门限)为半径的圆形区域内移动时，该终端设备不触发注册更新流程。当终端设备移动到前述圆形区域的边界或恰好移出该圆形区域(例如，该终端设备从图3A中的A点移动到B点)时，该终端设备将在B点触发注册更新流程。具体地，该终端设备将B点的位置通过接入网设备发送给核心网设备，并且，该终端设备根据B点的位置更新第一参考位置，即该第一参考位置从O点更新为B点。然后，该终端设备将以B点为新的第一参考位置计算该终端设备当前的位置与新的第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第一距离门限，并在达到第一距离门限时再次触发注册更新流程。以此循环。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于前述第一距离门限。可以理解为，该目标位置是在某个特定的区域内的位置，该特定的区域为已配置的用于触发注册更新流程的参数确定的区域。例如，由第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定的区域。也就是说，该目标位置为位于第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定的区域内的终端设备的位置。
应注意，目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于前述第一距离门限，即该目标位置 位于根据第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定的区域内。也就是说，核心网设备通过第一信息要求接入网设备上报的终端设备的位置是该终端设备位于第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定的区域内的位置，此时，该终端设备还未触发注册更新流程。因此，有利于节省因触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销。
应注意，本申请中，该目标位置可以如是以上任意一种实施方式中所描述，也可以同时满足前述两种实施方式的描述。具体此处不做限定。
应理解，当第一信息包含的内容不同时，第一信息指示的规则不同，该接入网设备获得前述目标位置的方式也不尽相同。下面分别进行介绍：
在方式一中，该第一信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时的该终端设备的位置。也可以理解为，该第一规则信息用于指示确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。可选地，该第一规则信息包括距离门限A，该距离门限A小于该第一距离门限。
在方式一的示例1中，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备或接入网设备，即第一规则信息能够指明决策终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到距离门限A的设备是终端设备或接入网设备。例如，在示例1中的一种实现方式中(后文称为示例1.1)，该第一规则信息用于指示由接入网设备确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。又例如，在示例1中的另一种实现方式中(后文称为示例1.2)，该第一规则信息用于指示由终端设备确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
在本示例1中，核心网设备在发送第一规则信息之前已确定由终端设备或接入网设备判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则。因此，该核心网设备能够明确获知获取目标位置的决策主体(即是由接入网设备决策终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则，还是终端设备决策是否满足第一规则)，有利于核心网设备基于不同的决策主体调整距离门限A的取值。此外，有利于降低终端设备和接入网设备的实现复杂度。
此外，在方式一的示例2中，该第一规则信息还可以不指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备或接入网设备，而是交给接入网设备实现。例如，在示例2中的一种实现方式中(后文称为示例2.1)，由接入网设备在收到第一规则信息之后基于当前网络质量等因素确定是由该接入网设备作为决策主体，即接入网设备自己判断终端设备当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到距离门限A。又例如，在示例2中的另一种实现方式中(后文称为示例2.2)，接入网设备决定由终端设备作为决策主体，将第一规则信息发送给终端设备，由该终端设备判断终端设备当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到距离门限A。
在本示例2中，接入网设备能够基于网络质量等因素确定获取目标位置的决策主体，有利于提高接入网设备向核心网上报目标位置的灵活性和准确性。
应理解，本实施例中的第一规则信息可以采用前述任意一种实现方式，具体此处不做限定。
在方式二中，该第一信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括 该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的该终端设备的每个位置。也可以理解为，该第二规则信息用于指示该接入网设备从终端设备接收的每个位置为目标位置。
应注意，本实施方式中，无论终端设备是基于何种原因向该接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，该接入网设备均将收到的终端设备的位置作为目标位置上报给核心网设备。
例如，若终端设备在切换(handover，HO)流程中向接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，接入网设备不仅基于该终端设备的位置决策是否进行切换，而且向核心网设备发送该终端设备的位置。又例如，接入网设备基于自身波束赋形优化需要，能够请求终端设备向该接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，进而接入网设备可以将获取的终端设备的位置发送给核心网设备。再例如，接入网设备可以指示终端设备上报该终端设备的位置，然后将该终端设备的位置转换成跟踪区标识(tracking area identity，TAI)并将该TAI上报给核心网设备(例如，AMF实体)，以便于核心网设备(例如，AMF实体)进行接入管理，在该示例中，接入网设备仅向核心网设备发送由终端设备的位置确定的TAI，而不直接向核心网设备上报该终端设备的位置。
若该接入网设备收到由前述任意一种示例所获得的终端设备的每个位置，则该接入网设备能够根据第二规则信息将终端设备的每个位置作为目标位置，并将该目标位置发送给核心网设备。
在方式三中，该第一信息包括第三规则信息，该第三规则信息用于该接入网设备确定该目标位置包括在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的该终端设备的位置。也可以理解为，该第三规则信息用于指示接入网设备确定在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
其中，释放(released)指终端设备从连接(connected)态进入空闲(idle)态；挂起(suspend)指终端设备从连接态进入非激活(inactive)态。
应理解，本实施例中的第一信息可以包括前述任意一种实施方式或多种实施方式中所介绍的规则信息，具体此处不做限定。
可选地，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置。也可以理解为，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备根据目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。例如，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备将目标位置作为注册更新流程的触发条件。可选地，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
步骤202，接入网设备根据第一信息向终端设备发送第二信息；相应地，终端设备从接入网设备接收第二信息。
其中，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息，该第二位置信息用于指示终端设备向接入网设备上报的目标位置。具体地，该第二信息可以是规则信息，用于确定该终端设备向接入网设备上报第二位置信息的规则。也就是说，当该终端设备收到前述第二信息之后，该终端设备能够基于该第二信息确定如何获得前述目标位置，以及如何将指示前述目标位置的第二位置信息上报给该接入网设备。可选地，该第二信息是指示信息，用于指示终端设备向接入网设备上报该终端设备当前的位置，并指示该终端设备当前上报的终端设备的位置为目标位置。可选地，该第二位置信息用于确定前述步骤201所介绍的第一 位置信息。具体地，基于第二位置信息确定第一位置信息的具体实现方式请参阅步骤206。
应理解，该第二信息是接入网设备基于第一信息确定的。该第二信息可能包含第一信息的部分或全部内容，该第二信息也可能与第一信息不同。当接入网设备收到的第一信息包含的内容不同时，第一信息指示的规则不同，该接入网设备确定的第二信息的内容也不尽相同。下面分别进行介绍：
在一种可能的实施方式中，第一信息包括前述第一规则信息，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为接入网设备(具体请参阅前述步骤201中方式一的示例1.1)，或者，接入网设备确定由该接入网设备判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则(具体请参阅前述步骤201中方式一的示例2.1)。此时，该接入网设备根据该第一规则信息确定的第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。示例性的，该终端设备收到第一指示信息之后确定的终端设备的位置，可以是该终端设备收到第一指示信息之后确定的第一个位置，也可以是该终端设备收到第一指示信息时该终端设备所在的位置。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，由于，终端设备与接入网设备存在无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)连接等通信连接，因此，在该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信令交互中，该接入网设备能够获得终端设备的位置。随着终端设备的移动，该接入网设备可能获得终端设备上报的一个或多个位置。该接入网设备每收到一个终端设备的位置之后，该接入网设备根据第一规则信息判断当前收到的终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到距离门限A。若该接入网设备确定当前收到的终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A，则接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，以指示该终端设备在收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
本实施方式中，该终端设备仅根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，而不要求终端设备判断该终端设备相比于第一参考位置之间的距离。因此，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度，也有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，第一信息采用步骤201中的方式一实现，即第一信息包括前述第一规则信息，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备(具体请参阅前述步骤201中方式一的示例1.2)，或者，接入网设备确定由该终端设备判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则(具体请参阅前述步骤201中方式一的示例2.2)。此时，该接入网设备根据该第一规则信息确定的第二信息包括前述第一规则信息。此时，由该终端设备基于该第一规则信息确定该终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到距离门限A，并且，由该终端设备确定与第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时，该终端设备的位置为目标位置。需要说明的，第二信息中的第一规则信息在内容和/或形式上可能和第一信息中的第一规则信息不完全一样，在此不对第一规则信息的具体实现形式进行限定。例如，接入网设备可以基于第一信息中的第一规则信息重新确定第二信息中的第一规则信息。又例如，该接入网设备直接将收到的第一信息中的第一规则信息作为第二信息中的第一规则信息发送给终端设备。
本实施方式中，由于，终端设备相比于接入网设备更容易确定该终端设备自己的位置，因此，有利于提高终端设备向接入网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性，进而有利于提 高接入网设备向核心网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，第一信息采用步骤201中的方式二实现，即第一信息包括前述第二规则信息。此时，该接入网设备根据该第二规则信息确定的第二信息包括前述第二规则信息。需要说明的，第二信息中的第二规则信息在内容和/或形式上可能和第一信息中的第二规则信息不完全一样，在此不对第二规则信息的具体实现形式进行限定。例如，接入网设备可以基于第一信息中的第二规则信息重新确定第二信息中的第二规则信息。又例如，该接入网设备直接将收到的第一信息中的第二规则信息作为第二信息中的第二规则信息发送给终端设备。
本实施方式中，核心网设备向接入网设备发送第二规则信息，以使得该接入网设备获知从终端设备收到的该终端设备的每个位置为目标位置。接入网设备向终端设备发送第二规则信息，以使得该终端设备能够获知该终端设备每次确定的位置均为目标位置，并均需要发送给该接入网设备。有利于使终端设备和接入网设备对目标位置的理解一致，避免终端设备用于更新第一参考位置的目标位置与接入网设备上报给核心网设备的目标位置不一致。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，第一信息采用步骤201中的方式三实现，即第一信息包括前述第三规则信息。此时，该接入网设备根据该第三规则信息确定的第二信息包括前述第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。示例性的，该终端设备收到第一指示信息之后确定的终端设备的位置，可以是该终端设备收到第一指示信息之后确定的第一个位置，也可以是该终端设备收到第一指示信息时该终端设备的所在的位置。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，终端设备与接入网设备存在RRC连接等通信连接，该接入网设备能够接收来自终端设备的业务数据。若该接入网设备在某一段时间内一直没有收到来自终端设备的业务数据，则该接入网设备可以确定该终端设备即将离开连接态而进入非连接态(例如，空闲态或非激活态)，即该接入网设备确定该终端设备需要被释放或被挂起。于是，该接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，以指示该终端设备在收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
本实施方式中，该终端设备能够在进入非连接态(例如，非激活态或空闲态)之前，根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置。因此，能够避免终端设备在进入非连接态之后的短时间内由于需要触发注册更新流程而重新进入连接态，不仅有利于节省信令开销，还有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
应理解，本实施方式中的第一指示信息与前述实施方式中的第一指示信息可以是同一个指示信息，也可以是不同的指示信息(例如在内容和形式上有差别但作用相同)，在此并不限定。该终端设备在收到前述第一指示信息时，该终端设备并不感知接入网设备是基于何种规则确定的目标位置，该终端设备能够确定在收到第一指示信息之后向该接入网设备上报的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
应理解，当本实施例中的第一信息仅包括前述任意一种实施方式所介绍的规则信息时，该接入网设备确定的第二信息由前述第一信息的实现方式确定。当本实施例中的第一信息包括前述两种或多种实施方式所介绍的规则信息时，该第二信息也包括多种实现方式，并且，每种实现方式与前述第一信息对应。具体此处不做限定。
可选地，当该第一信息包括第二指示信息时，该第二信息也包括第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置。也可以理解为，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备根据目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。具体地，终端设备根据目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件的具体实现方式，请参阅后文步骤204中的介绍。
应注意，本实施例中，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送第二信息，相应地，终端设备的AS从接入网设备接收前述第二信息。可选地，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
步骤203，终端设备基于第二信息确定目标位置。
本实施例中，当终端设备收到的第二信息包含的内容不同时，该终端设备基于第二信息确定目标位置的方式也不同。下面分别进行介绍：
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时的该终端设备的位置，该距离门限A小于该第一距离门限。此时，该终端设备能够基于第一规则信息判断该终端设备当前的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离。当该终端设备当前的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该距离门限A时，该终端设备确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置。
为便于理解，以图3B为例，核心网设备为终端设备配置的注册更新规则包括第一参考位置(即O点)和第一距离门限(R1)，而接入网设备发送给终端设备的第一规则信息包括距离门限A(R2)。当该终端设备在以O点(即第一参考位置)为圆心R1(即第一距离门限)为半径的圆形区域内移动时，该终端设备不触发注册更新流程，并且，当该终端设备在以O点(即第一参考位置)为圆心R2(即距离门限A)为半径的圆形区域内移动时，该终端设备不需要确定目标位置。当终端设备移动到以O点为圆心R2为半径的圆形区域的边界或恰好移出该圆形区域(例如，该终端设备从图3B中的A点移动到C点)时，该终端设备将在确定C点所在的位置为目标位置。由图3B可知，C点位于以O点为圆心R1为半径的圆形区域内。
本实施方式中，由终端设备根据第一规则信息确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置。由于，终端设备相比于接入网设备更容易确定该终端设备自己的位置，因此，有利于提高终端设备向接入网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性，进而有利于提高接入网设备向核心网设备发送的目标位置的准确性和及时性。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。此时，该终端设备将在收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置确定为该目标位置。
具体地，该终端设备在收到第一指示信息之后，该终端设备可以通过全球定位系统(global positioning system，GPS)或全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system，GNSS)等能够获取位置信息的模块获取该终端设备当前的位置，并将该终端设备当前的位置确定为目标位置。
应理解，本实施方式中的第一指示信息可能是接入网设备基于第一规则信息触发的，即该接入网设备根据第一规则信息确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到距离门限A时向该终端设备发送的前述第一指示信息；前述第一指示信息也可能是接入网设备基于 第三规则信息触发的，即该接入网设备根据该第三规则信息确定该终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时向该终端设备发送的前述第一指示信息。具体此处不做限定。
本实施方式中，该终端设备仅根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，而不要求终端设备判断该终端设备相比于第一参考位置之间的距离，也不要求终端设备确定是否被释放或挂起。因此，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度，也有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的该终端设备的每个位置。
应理解，该终端设备在未收到第二规则信息之前，该终端设备可能已配置有用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息，例如，基于切换的测量配置等。无论该终端设备是否收到前述第二规则信息，该终端设备均基于已配置的用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息确定该终端设备的位置。当该终端设备收到前述第二规则信息之后，该终端设备将确定的每个位置确定为目标位置，并将前述每个目标位置发送给接入网设备。
还应理解的是，一般网络侧会为终端设备配置多种用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息，并且，终端设备获取该终端设备的位置的频繁程度是高于终端设备触发注册更新的频繁程度。因此，该终端设备总能够在图3B所示的以O点为圆心R1为半径的圆形区域内确定一个或多个位置为目标位置。
本实施方式中，该接入网设备将前述第二规则信息发送给终端设备，有利于该终端设备获知该接入网设备会将该终端设备每次上报给接入网设备的位置均确定为目标位置，有利于使终端设备和接入网设备对目标位置的理解一致，进而有利于终端设备避免触发不必要的注册更新流程，进而节省信令开销。
应注意，在实际应用中，该终端设备可能基于前述任意一种实施方式所介绍的第二信息生成目标位置，也可能同时基于前述多种实施方式所介绍的第二信息生成目标位置，具体此处不做限定。
还应注意，在实际应用中，该终端设备的AS将通过前述任意一种或多种实施方式确定该终端设备的目标位置，而不是终端设备的NAS获取终端设备的位置。有利于从终端设备的AS接收目标位置的接入网设备能够感知目标位置，进而使得接入网设备确定出更准确的目标位置上报给核心网设备。
步骤204，终端设备基于目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
其中，注册更新流程的触发条件可以理解为是触发注册更新流程的参数达到某个取值，当终端设备的某个指标达到前述参数的取值时，该终端设备触发注册更新流程。
具体地，该终端设备基于目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发注册更新流程。示例性的，该终端设备在基于目标位置确定第二参考位置之前，该终端设备基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程，即当该终端设备当前的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到前述第一距离门限，则该终端设备触发注册更新流程。该终端设备在基于目标位置确定第二参考位置之后，若该终端设备没有确定其他的距离门限，则该终端设备基于第二参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程，即当该终端设备当前的位置与第二参考位置之间的距离达到前述第一距离门限，则该终端设备触发注册更新流程。在该示例中，由于 触发注册更新流程的参数从第一参考位置变更为第二参考位置，因此，也可以理解为，终端设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置，得到第二参考位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备直接采用目标位置作为第二参考位置。
具体地，在该终端设备内部，该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送目标位置，然后，该终端设备的NAS基于该目标位置更新该第一参考位置，得到该第二参考位置。
应注意，在实际实现中，该终端设备的AS可以是基于第二指示信息的指示才向该终端设备的NAS发送目标位置，也可以由协议规定该终端设备的AS将收到的目标位置发送给该终端设备的NAS。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的NAS采用该目标位置替换掉核心网配置的第一参考位置，得到的第二参考位置即为目标位置。此后，该终端设备的NAS将以第二参考位置和第一距离门限作为触发注册更新流程的参数。也就是说，该终端设备的NAS将在确定该终端设备的位置与第二参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限之后，该终端设备的NAS才会触发注册更新流程。
为便于理解，仍旧以图3B为例，当终端设备移动到以O点为圆心R2为半径的圆形区域的边界或恰好移出该圆形区域(例如，该终端设备从图3B中的A点移动到C点)时，该终端设备将确定C点所在位置为目标位置。然后，该终端设备采用C点的位置更新第一参考位置，得到第二参考位置，即C点确定为第二参考位置。此后，该终端设备在确定是否触发注册更新流程时，该终端设备将基于该终端设备当前的位置与C点的位置(即第二参考位置)之间的距离是否达到第一距离门限来确定。如图3B所示，在第一距离门限不变的情况下，该终端设备至少需要从C点移动再到D点才会触发注册更新流程。也就是说，采用本实施方式所介绍的方案，终端设备从A点移动到D点这段距离之内，该终端设备不会触发注册更新流程；而若按照传统技术的注册更新机制，该终端设备从A点移动到B点便会触发注册更新流程。由此可见，本申请提供的方案延长了终端设备触发注册更新流程之间的时长，降低了终端设备触发注册更新流程的频率，从而节省了因触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销。
应注意，在实际应用中，注册更新流程的触发条件还可以包括其他的信息。例如，第一参考位置、第一距离门限以及第二距离门限等。
步骤205，终端设备向接入网设备发送第二位置信息；相应地，接入网设备从终端设备接收第二位置信息。
其中，该第二位置信息用于指示该终端设备基于第二信息确定的目标位置。该第二位置信息可以包含一个或多个目标位置。
具体地，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送前述第二位置信息；相应地，接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收第二位置信息。
由于，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送第二位置信息，而不是终端设备的NAS向接入网设备发送第二位置信息，因此，该接入网设备能够感知从终端设备的AS接收的内容，进而使得接入网设备确定出更准确的目标位置上报给核心网设备。
应理解，步骤204与步骤205无明确的时间先后顺序的限定。也就是说，终端设备可以先执行步骤204再执行步骤205，也可以先执行步骤205再执行步骤204，还可以同时执行步骤204和步骤205。具体本实施例不做限定。
步骤206，接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定第一位置信息。
其中，第二位置信息是接入网设备从终端设备接收的用于指示目标位置的信息；该第一位置信息是接入网设备需要发送给核心网设备的用于指示目标位置的信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，接入网设备直接将第二位置信息作为第一位置信息，即该接入网设备确定的第一位置信息与该接入网设备收到的第二位置信息相同。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，第二位置信息与第一位置信息的格式、内容、精度不完全相同，但都用于指示目标位置。其中，精度可以理解为是描述目标位置的单位的精度。示例性的，第二位置信息的精度可以为米，第一位置信息的精度可以为公里。
步骤207，接入网设备向核心网设备发送第一位置信息；相应地，核心网设备从接入网设备接收该第一位置信息。
其中，该第一位置信息用于指示该接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定的目标位置。该第一位置信息可以指示终端设备的一个或多个目标位置。其中，该第一位置信息指示的目标位置与该第二位置信息指示的目标位置相同。
步骤208，核心网设备基于第一位置信息确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
其中，当该终端设备位于该注册区域内时，该终端设备不触发注册更新流程；当该终端设备离开该注册区域(例如，该终端设备越过该注册区域的边界)时，该终端设备触发注册更新流程。
具体地，该核心网设备基于第一位置信息指示的目标位置确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限，该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限用于触发所述注册更新流程。本实施例中，该核心网设备可以仅基于目标位置确定第二参考位置，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置而获得第二参考位置；该核心网设备也可以基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置同时更新第一参考位置和第一距离门限而获得第二参考位置和第二距离门限。下面分别进行介绍：
在一种可能的实施方式中，该核心网设备基于目标位置仅确定第二参考位置，而没有确定除了第一距离门限之外的其他的距离门限(例如，第二距离门限)。示例性的，该核心网设备将该目标位置作为第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于替换掉核心网存储的第一参考位置。此时，该终端设备的注册区域可以是由第二参考位置和第一距离门限确定的区域。例如，该终端设备的注册区域为以第二参考位置为圆心且第一距离门限为半径的圆形区域；又例如，该终端设备的注册区域为以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第一距离门限为前述几何中心到矩形的边的矩形。本申请不对注册区域的具体形状进行限定。
本实施方式中，由于终端设备和核心网设备均基于目标位置更新了第一参考位置而获得了第二参考位置，因此，当该核心网设备再次收到终端设备触发的注册更新申请时，该核心网设备能够确定该终端设备当前所在的位置，即该终端设备当时所在的位置与第二参考位置之间的距离达到了第一距离门限。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该核心网设备基于目标位置同时确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限。具体地，该核心网设备除了将该目标位置作为第二参考位置之外，该核心网设备还基于收到的目标位置的频繁程度确定第二距离门限。示例性的，若该核心网设备在预设时长内收到的目标位置的数量达到预设数量(其中，预设时长和预设数量可以基于网络质量等 因素确定)，则说明该第一距离门限设置较小，该核心网设备可以将该第一距离门限更新为第二距离门限，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。因此，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，有利于延长终端设备触发两次注册更新流程之间的时间间隔。此时，该终端设备的注册区域可以是由第二参考位置和第二距离门限确定的区域。例如，该终端设备的注册区域为以第二参考位置为圆心且第二距离门限为半径的圆形区域；又例如，该终端设备的注册区域为以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第二距离门限为前述几何中心到矩形的边的矩形。本申请不对注册区域的具体形状进行限定。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该核心网设备基于TAC列表确定第二距离门限。具体的，TAC列表由接入网设备根据波束标识信息确定并发送给核心网设备，其中，波束标识信息用于指示终端设备通信所用的波束，该波束标识信息可以是同步信号块标识(synchronization signal block identifier，SSB ID)。可选地，该TAC列表可以包含在接入网设备发送给核心网设备的用户位置信息(User Location Information)中，也可以包含在接入网设备发送给核心网设备的其他信息中，在此不做限制。可选地，接入网设备获得波束标识信息的方法包括，终端设备确定目标位置并向接入网设备发送覆盖该目标位置的波束的标识信息，或者，终端设备在注册更新时向接入网设备发送覆盖该终端设备所在位置的波束的标识信息，波束标识信息可以包含在终端设备向接入网设备发送的RRC连接建立完成(RRC Setup Complete)消息中。此外，也可以由接入网设备通过内部算法实现获得波束标识信息。可选的，TAC列表由接入网设备根据终端设备上报的第二位置信息确定并发送给核心网设备。
需要说明的，本实施方式中的TAC列表可以包括一个或多个TAC，在此不做限定。另外，上述TAC列表也可以替换成TAI列表，在此不做限定。
在本实施方式中，由于核心网设备并不感知终端设备的具体位置，仅处理TAC列表，有利于与现有技术兼容，而且可以在安全建立之前UE无法上报位置时，确定距离门限。有利于尽早确定注册区域，提高注册区域准确性，提高寻呼性能。
应注意，由于该核心网设备确定了第二距离门限，而该终端设备没有确定第二距离门限，因此，该核心网设备可以通过接入网设备向终端设备发送前述第二距离门限，以使得终端设备能够基于第二参考位置和第二距离门限触发注册更新流程。有利于使得终端设备使用的参考位置和/或距离门限等参数与核心网设备确定的参考位置和/或距离门限等参数保持一致。
本申请中，由于，接入网设备能够根据核心网设备的指示向核心网设备上报由该接入网设备确定的终端设备的位置信息，核心网设备无需等待终端设备发起注册更新流程，就能够及时获取终端设备的位置信息并用于确定该终端设备的寻呼区域或注册区域，提高了对终端设备进行寻呼管理和/或注册管理的及时性与准确性。此外，由于核心网设备可以不通过注册更新流程就获取到终端设备的位置信息，而终端设备无需发起不必要的注册更新流程来上报位置信息，有利于节省终端设备因触发注册更新流程而导致的信令开销。
此外，由于，该终端设备还未基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新，说明该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于前述第一距离门限。此时，若核心网设备和终端设备能够更新第一参考位置(例如，用终端设备当前的位置替换该第一参考位置)，则将缩短终端设备的位置与更新后的第一参考位置之间的距离，有利于降低终端设备触发注册更新的频率，有利于延长终端设备触发注册更新流程之间的时间间隔。在NTN系统中，即使卫星的 波束移动导致终端设备的跟踪区域(trace area，TA)和小区标识频繁变更，该终端设备也能够在不触发注册更新的情况下向接入网设备上报目标位置，并基于目标位置更新第一参考位置，以使得终端设备总是位于注册区域内，而不会频繁触发注册更新，有利于节省因触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销，还有利于节省终端设备的功耗。
可选地，该核心网设备基于第一位置信息确定终端设备的寻呼区域的具体实施方式请参阅后文图9对应的实施例。此处不予赘述。
步骤209，核心网设备根据第一对应关系和第一位置信息确定该第一位置信息对应的TAC。
本实施例中，步骤209为可选的步骤。
其中，第一位置信息可以由地理位置信息表示，核心网设备在收到指示目标位置的第一位置信息之后，能够确定该目标位置所在的地理区域，进而，该核心网设备基于第一对应关系能够确定该地理区域对应的TAC，其中，该第一对应关系为地理区域与TAC之间的对应关系。关于第一位置信息的详细描述可以参考前述步骤201中的相关内容，不予赘述。
由于，核心网设备能够将采用经纬度等地理位置信息表示的目标位置转换为跟踪区域码TAC，以使得核心网设备内部的基于TAC实现的某些策略(例如，基于TAC选择SMF实体或UPF实体。)能够与基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制衔接。有利于提高基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制与传统技术中基于TAC的注册更新机制的兼容性，以使得系统平稳运行。
前面对本申请提出的信息更新方法的主要流程进行了介绍，下面将分别针对第一信息的不同实现方式下的实施例进行介绍。
如图4所示，为前述第一信息包括第一规则信息时的一种实施方式，本实施方式中，由接入网设备确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限(例如，前文介绍的距离门限A)。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤401，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备的NAS发送注册更新规则信息；相应地，终端设备的NAS通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收注册更新规则信息。
其中，该注册更新规则信息用于指示基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限的注册更新规则，即当该终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第一距离门限时，该终端设备触发注册更新流程。其中，该注册更新规则信息包括第一距离门限。可选地，该注册更新规则信息包括第一参考位置。其中，关于第一参考位置和第一距离门限的解释可以参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
应理解，当该注册更新规则信息未包含该第一参考位置时，该终端设备将采用上一次触发注册更新流程时发送的位置作为第一参考位置。
应注意，该注册更新规则信息可以携带于核心网设备发送给终端设备的NAS的某个消息中。例如，在步骤401之前的某一次注册更新流程中，终端设备NAS可以通过注册请求(Registration Request)消息向核心网设备发送终端设备的位置信息，然后，该核心网设备根据终端设备的位置信息为终端设备配置注册更新规则信息，并通过注册接纳(Registration Accept)消息将该注册更新规则信息发送该终端设备的NAS。此外，该注册更新规则信息也 可以不放在注册接纳(Registration Accept)消息中，而是作为一条独立的消息通过接入网设备发送给终端设备的NAS。具体本申请不对携带注册更新规则信息的消息的种类进行限定。
步骤402，核心网设备向接入网设备发送包括第一规则信息的第一信息；相应地，接入网设备从核心网设备接收包括第一规则信息的第一信息。
其中，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的该终端设备的位置。也可以理解为，该第一规则信息用于指示确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
可选地，该第一规则信息包括第三距离门限，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。此时，该第三距离门限可以与该第一规则信息包含在一条由核心网设备发送给接入网设备的消息中，也可以由核心网设备通过其他的消息发送给接入网设备，具体此处不做限定。
在一种实现中，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为接入网设备，即第一规则信息能够指明决策终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限的设备是接入网设备。具体地，请参阅前文步骤201中方式一的示例1.1的相关介绍。
在另一种实现中，接入网设备在收到第一规则信息之后基于当前网络质量等因素确定由该接入网设备作为决策主体，即接入网设备自己判断终端设备当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到门限。具体地，请参阅前文步骤201中方式二的示例2.1的相关介绍。
应理解，本实施例中的第一规则信息可以采用前述任意一种实现方式，每种实现方式的有益效果请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
此外，在实际应用中，前述第三距离门限可以是由核心网设备确定并下发的距离门限，即核心网设备基于某种规则或算法确定的一个距离门限作为第三距离门限；该第三距离门限也可以是接入网设备已确认并在步骤401之前已发送给核心网的距离门限；该第三距离门限还可以是协议规定的距离门限，具体此处不做限定。此外，在实际应用中，该第一参考位置可以是在步骤401之前该终端设备最新上报的该终端设备的位置，例如，该终端设备在步骤401之前通过触发注册更新流程而上报给核心网设备的位置；该第一参考位置也可以是由核心网设备基于某种规则或算法确认并下发的位置；该第一参考位置还可以是接入网设备在历史某一时刻基于某种规则或算法确认的并已发送给核心网设备的位置；该第一参考位置还可以是终端设备基于某种规则或算法确定的并已发送给接入网设备和/或核心网设备位置；该第一参考位置还可以是根据核心网设备根据该终端设备历史上报的位置以及某种算法计算后的位置。例如，基于终端设备在步骤401之前最新上报的两次或多次位置计算出的统计值(例如，平均值)作为第一参考位置。又例如，基于终端设备在步骤401之前最新上报的两次或多次位置通过滤波算法(例如，阿尔法(alpha)滤波算法)计算出的位置。在实际应用中，还可能采用其他的方式确定第一参考位置，具体此处不做限定。
可选地，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息。关于第二指示信息的解释请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤403，当确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送包括第一指示信息的第二信息；相应地，该终端设备的AS从该接入网设备接收包括第一指示信息的第二信息。
其中，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
可选地，当该第一信息包括第二指示信息时，该第二信息也包括第二指示信息。可选地，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。此时，步骤403中，当确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送的第二信息不仅包括第一指示信息还包括第二指示信息。
关于步骤403的详细介绍可以参考前述步骤202中的相关内容，不予赘述。
步骤404，终端设备的AS响应于第一指示信息而获取该终端设备当前的位置，并确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置。
本步骤中，该终端设备的AS收到第一指示信息之后，该终端设备的AS获取终端设备的位置，例如，通过GPS或GNSS等能够获取位置信息的模块。与此同时，该终端设备的AS确定该终端设备的AS在收到第一指示信息之后确定的第一个位置或该终端设备收到第一指示信息时该终端设备的所在的位置为目标位置。
实施例中，该终端设备的AS能够根据第一指示信息获取终端设备的位置并确定获取到的该终端设备的位置为目标位置。由于，终端设备一般通过终端设备的AS与接入网设备进行信令交互，通过终端设备的NAS与核心网设备交互。因此，由终端设备的AS确定目标位置，有利于该终端设备通过该终端设备的AS向接入网设备上报目标位置。此外，也有利于使得传统技术中的基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新机制和本申请提出的信息更新方法兼容。
步骤405，终端设备的AS向终端设备的NAS发送目标位置；相应地，终端设备的NAS从终端设备的AS接收目标位置。
在一种可能的实现中，步骤405可以是由终端设备的AS收到的第二指示信息触发的，即该终端设备的AS收到第二指示信息之后，该终端设备的AS便具备向终端设备的NAS发送目标位置的功能。
在另一种可能的实现中，步骤405也可以是由协议规定的，即协议规定了当该终端设备的AS收到目标位置之后，该终端设备的AS能够向该终端设备的NAS发送该终端设备的目标位置。
步骤406，终端设备的NAS基于目标位置确定第二参考位置。
其中，该第二参考位置用于触发注册更新流程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的NAS直接采用目标位置作为第二参考位置，并且，基于该第二参考位置确定是否触发注册更新流程。由于，在步骤406之前，该终端设备的NAS是基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限确定是否触发注册更新流程，而在步骤406之后，该终端设备的NAS基于第二参考位置和第一距离门限确定是否触发注册更新流程。因此，可以理解为，该终端设备的NAS将第一参考位置替换或更新为第二参考位置。
此后，该终端设备的NAS将以第二参考位置和第一距离门限作为触发注册更新流程的参数。也就是说，该终端设备的NAS将在确定该终端设备的位置与第二参考位置之间的距离达到第一距离门限之后，该终端设备的NAS才会触发注册更新流程。
步骤407，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送指示目标位置的第二位置信息；相应地，接 入网设备从终端设备的AS接收指示目标位置的第二位置信息。
应理解，本实施例中，步骤407与前述步骤405和步骤406之间无明确的时间先后顺序的限定，仅需要该步骤407在步骤404之后执行即可。例如，该步骤407可以在步骤404之后步骤405之前执行；又例如，该步骤407可以在步骤405之后步骤406之前执行；又例如，该步骤407可以在步骤406之后执行。具体此处不做限定。
步骤408，接入网设备向核心网设备发送指示目标位置的第一位置信息；相应地，核心网设备从接入网设备接收该指示目标位置的第一位置信息。
其中，第二位置信息是接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收的用于指示目标位置的信息；该第一位置信息是接入网设备需要发送给核心网设备的用于指示目标位置的信息。该第一位置信息是接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定的。具体地，请参阅前文步骤206中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤409，核心网络设备基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。
本实施例中，该核心网设备可以仅基于目标位置确定第二参考位置，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置更新第一参考位置而获得第二参考位置；该核心网设备也可以基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限，也可以理解为，该核心网设备基于目标位置同时更新第一参考位置和第一距离门限而获得第二参考位置和第二距离门限。
步骤410，核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该核心网设备基于目标位置仅确定第二参考位置，而没有确定其他的距离门限。此时，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该核心网设备基于目标位置同时确定第二参考位置和第二距离门限。此时，该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第二距离门限确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
关于以上步骤409和步骤410的具体描述请参阅前文步骤208中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
本实施例中，由于终端设备不需执行注册请求消息、注册接纳消息等一系列注册更新流程，便可以在收到第一指示信息之后确定终端设备的位置，并仅将该终端设备的位置(即指示目标位置的第二位置信息)上报给接入网设备，进而该接入网设备将前述目标位置上报给核心网设备。因此，不仅有利于核心网设备及时获得终端设备的位置信息，还能够节省因触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销。
如图5所示，为前述第一信息包括第一规则信息时的另一种实施方式。本实施方式中，由接入网设备将第一规则信息发送给终端设备，由终端设备确定该终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤501，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备的NAS发送注册更新规则信息；相应地，终端设备的NAS通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收注册更新规则信息。
本实施例中，步骤501与步骤401类似，具体请参阅图4对应实施例中的步骤401的相关介绍。
步骤502，核心网设备向接入网设备发送包括第一规则信息的第一信息；相应地，接入网设备从核心网设备接收包括第一规则信息的第一信息。
其中，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的该终端设备的位置。也可以理解为，该第一规则信息用于指示确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
可选地，该第一规则信息包括第三距离门限，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。此时，该第三距离门限可以与该第一规则信息包含在一条由核心网设备发送给接入网设备，也可以由核心网设备通过其他的消息发送给接入网设备，具体此处不做限定。
在一种实现中，该第一规则信息能够指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备，即第一规则信息能够指明决策终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限的设备是终端设备。例如，该第一规则信息用于指示终端设备确定与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的终端设备的位置为目标位置。具体地，请参阅前文步骤201中方式一的示例1.2的相关介绍。
在另一种实现中，该第一规则信息还可以不指明判断终端设备的位置是否满足第一规则的决策主体为终端设备或接入网设备，而是交给接入网设备实现。也就是说，由接入网设备在收到第一规则信息之后基于当前网络质量等因素确定由终端设备作为决策主体，即终端设备判断自己当前所在的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到门限。具体地，请参阅前文步骤201中方式一的示例2.2的相关介绍。
应理解，本实施例中的第一规则信息可以采用前述任意一种实现方式，每种实现方式的有益效果请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
此外，前述第三距离门限可能的实现方式可以参阅前述步骤402中的关于第三距离门限的介绍。
可选地，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息。关于第二指示信息的解释请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤503，接入网设备向终端设备发送包括第一规则信息的第二信息；相应地，终端设备从接入网设备接收包括第一规则信息的第二信息。
本实施例中，由于是由终端设备判断该终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限，因此，该接入网设备在收到第一规则信息并解析该第一规则信息之后，该接入网设备将向该终端设备的AS发送该第一规则信息。需要说明的，接入网设备向该终端设备的AS发送的第一规则信息，与接入网设备从核心网设备接收到的第一规则信息，在内容和/或形式上，可能相同也可能不同，在此并不限定。
可选地，当该第一信息包括第二指示信息时，该第二信息也包括第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备的NAS基于目标位置更新第一参考位置。也可以理解为，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备的NAS根据目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。可选地，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
步骤504，终端设备的AS根据第一规则信息确定与第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距 离门限的终端设备的位置为目标位置。
本实施例中，该终端设备的AS能够基于第一规则信息判断该终端设备当前的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离。当该终端设备当前的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，该终端设备的AS确定该终端设备当前的位置为该目标位置。
示例性的，该终端设备的AS可以基于传统技术中配置的确定终端设备的位置的方式周期性或非周期性地获取终端设备当前的位置，当该终端设备当前的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，该终端设备的AS确定该终端设备当前的位置为该目标位置。
步骤505，终端设备的AS向终端设备的NAS发送目标位置；相应地，终端设备的NAS从终端设备的AS接收目标位置。
步骤506，终端设备的NAS基于目标位置确定第二参考位置。
步骤507，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送指示目标位置的第二位置信息；相应地，接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收指示目标位置第二位置信息。
步骤508，接入网设备向核心网设备发送指示目标位置的第一位置信息；相应地，核心网设备从接入网设备接收该指示目标位置的第一位置信息。
其中，第二位置信息是接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收的用于指示目标位置的信息；该第一位置信息是接入网设备需要发送给核心网设备的用于指示目标位置的信息。该第一位置信息是接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定的。具体地，请参阅前文步骤206中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤509，核心网络设备基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。
步骤510，核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施例中，步骤505至步骤510与前述实施例中的步骤405至步骤410的内容类似，具体请参阅前文步骤405至步骤410的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
本实施例中，由于终端设备不需执行注册请求消息、注册接纳消息等一系列注册更新流程，便可以在确定终端设备的位置满足第一规则信息时确定目标位置，并仅将该终端设备的位置(即指示目标位置的第二位置信息)上报给接入网设备，进而该接入网设备将前述目标位置上报给核心网设备。因此，不仅有利于核心网设备及时获得终端设备的位置信息，还能够节省因触发注册更新流程而造成的信令开销。
如图6所示，为前述第一信息包括第二规则信息时的一种实施方式，本实施方式中，由终端设备向接入网设备发送的每个位置均为目标位置，即该接入网设备将从终端设备接收的该终端设备的每个位置确定为目标位置。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤601，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备的NAS发送注册更新规则信息；相应地，终端设备的NAS通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收注册更新规则信息。
本实施例中，步骤601与步骤401类似，具体请参阅图4对应实施例中的步骤401的相关介绍。
步骤602，核心网设备向接入网设备发送包括第二规则信息的第一信息；相应地，接入网设备从核心网设备接收包括第二规则信息的第一信息。
其中，关于第二规则信息的解释请参阅前文步骤201中方式二的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
可选地，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息。关于第二指示信息的解释请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤603，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送包括第二规则信息的第二信息；相应地，终端设备从接入网设备接收包括第二规则信息的第二信息。
其中，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送的第二规则信息，与接入网设备从核心网设备接收到的第二规则信息，在内容和/或形式上，可能相同也可能不同，在此并不限定。
可选地，当该第一信息包括第二指示信息时，该第二信息也包括第二指示信息。
步骤604，终端设备的AS根据第二规则信息确定向接入网设备发送的该终端设备的每个位置均为目标位置。
应理解，该终端设备在未收到第二规则信息之前，该终端设备可能已配置有用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息，例如，基于切换的测量配置等。无论该终端设备是否收到前述第二规则信息，该终端设备均基于已配置的用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息确定该终端设备的位置。当该终端设备收到前述第二规则信息之后，该终端设备将确定的每个位置确定为目标位置，并将前述每个目标位置发送给接入网设备。
步骤605，终端设备的AS向终端设备的NAS发送目标位置；相应地，终端设备的NAS从终端设备的AS接收目标位置。
步骤606，终端设备的NAS基于目标位置确定第二参考位置。
步骤607，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送指示目标位置的第二位置信息；相应地，接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收指示目标位置的第二位置信息。
步骤608，接入网设备向核心网设备发送指示目标位置的第一位置信息；相应地，核心网设备从接入网设备接收指示目标位置的第一位置信息。该第一位置信息是接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定的。具体地，请参阅前文步骤206中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤609，核心网络设备基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。
步骤610，核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施例中，步骤605至步骤610与前述实施例中的步骤405至步骤410的内容类似，具体请参阅前文步骤405至步骤410的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
本实施例中，由于终端设备的AS本就可以基于已配置的用于确定终端设备的位置的配置信息向接入网设备上报终端设备的位置，而本实施例中接入网设备能够将从终端设备的AS接收的终端设备的位置作为目标位置上报给核心网设备，而不需要通过注册请求消息、注册接纳消息等一系列注册更新流程向核心网设备上报终端设备的位置。因此，能够节省信令开销。
本实施例中，终端设备能够基于第二规则信息将该终端设备获得的每个位置均作为目标位置上报给接入网设备，而该接入网设备能够感知每个来自终端设备的该终端设备的位置， 并将来自该终端设备的每个位置作为目标位置上报给核心网设备。因此，终端设备的位置可以不依赖于注册更新流程便上报给核心网设备，不仅提高了核心网设备获得终端设备的及时性和准确性，还节省了信令开销。
如图7所示，为前述第一信息包括第三规则信息时的一种实施方式，本实施方式中，由接入网设备确定终端设备的位置与第一参考位置之间的距离是否达到第三距离门限。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤701，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备的NAS发送注册更新规则信息；相应地，终端设备的NAS通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收注册更新规则信息。
本实施例中，步骤701与步骤401类似，具体请参阅图4对应实施例中的步骤401的相关介绍。
步骤702，核心网设备向接入网设备发送包括第三规则信息的第一信息；相应地，接入网设备从核心网设备接收包括第三规则信息第一信息。
其中，关于第三规则信息的解释请参阅前文步骤201中方式三的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
可选地，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，关于第二指示信息的解释请参照前文步骤201中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤703，当确定终端设备需要释放或挂起时，接入网设备向终端设备的AS发送包括第一指示信息的第二信息。
其中，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
可选地，当该第一信息包括第二指示信息时，该第二信息也包括第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备的NAS基于目标位置更新第一参考位置。也可以理解为，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备的NAS根据目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。可选地，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
关于步骤703的详细介绍可以参考前述步骤202中的相关内容，不予赘述。
步骤704，终端设备的AS响应于第一指示信息而获取该终端设备当前的位置，并确定该终端设备当前的位置为目标位置。
步骤705，终端设备的AS向终端设备的NAS发送目标位置；相应地，终端设备的NAS从终端设备的AS接收目标位置。
步骤706，终端设备的NAS基于目标位置确定第二参考位置。
步骤707，终端设备的AS向接入网设备发送指示目标位置的第二位置信息；相应地，接入网设备从终端设备的AS接收指示目标位置的第二位置信息。
步骤708，接入网设备向核心网设备发送指示目标位置的第一位置信息；相应地，核心网设备从接入网设备接收指示目标位置的第一位置信息。该第一位置信息是接入网设备基于第二位置信息确定的。具体地，请参阅前文步骤206中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤709，核心网络设备基于目标位置确定第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。
步骤710，核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/ 或注册区域。
本实施例中，步骤705至步骤710与前述实施例中的步骤405至步骤410的内容类似，具体请参阅前文步骤405至步骤410的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
本实施例中，由接入网设备能够基于第三规则信息确定终端设备是否需要被释放或被挂起，并且，该接入网设备能够在终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时向终端设备的AS发送第一指示信息。于是，该终端设备的AS在进入非连接态(例如，非激活态或空闲态)之前，该终端设备的AS根据第一指示信息获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，以使得接入网设备将前述目标位置发送给核心网设备。由于，网络侧能够在终端设备被释放或被挂起之前获得终端设备的目标位置，并基于终端设备的目标位置确定注册区域，避免终端设备在进入空闲态或非激活态不久又因为离开注册区域而触发注册更新流程。因此，有利于降低注册更新的频率，节省信令开销。
应注意，若前述实施例中的步骤405(或步骤505、或步骤605、或步骤705)、步骤407(或步骤507、或步骤607、或步骤707)以及步骤408(或步骤508、或步骤608、或步骤708)中发送的内容可以替换为第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。也就是说，当该终端设备的AS确定目标位置之后，该终端设备的AS具备可以基于该目标位置确定用于更新第一参考位置的第二参考位置以及用于更新第二距离门限的第一距离门限。此时，前述步骤405(或步骤505、或步骤605、或步骤705)可以替换为，该终端设备的AS向终端设备的NAS发送第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。此时，在步骤406(或步骤506、或步骤606、或步骤706)中，该终端设备的NAS便可以直接基于收到的第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限更新核心网设备配置的第一参考位置和/或第一距离门限。在步骤407(或步骤507、或步骤607、或步骤707)中，该终端设备的AS将向接入网设备发送第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。在步骤408(或步骤508、或步骤608、或步骤708)中，该接入网设备也将向核心网设备发送第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。在步骤409(或步骤509、或步骤609、或步骤709)中，核心网设备可以直接基于收到的第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限更新第一参考位置和/或第一距离门限。需要说明的是，本申请中前述图2、图4、图5、图6以及图7对应的实施例之间可以相互结合或相互参考，示例性的，图7对应的实施例可以分别与图2、图4、图5和图6对应的实施例结合。应注意，当图7对应的实施例与图4对应的实施例结合时，核心网设备向接入网设备发送的第一信息包括第一规则信息和第三规则信息，而该接入网设备发送给终端设备的第一指示信息可能是接入网设备基于第一规则信息确定的，也可能是接入网设备基于第三规则信息确定的。该终端设备不感知是基于何种原因收到的第一指示信息，该终端设备仅能够获知需要在收到第一指示信息之后确定该终端设备的位置为目标位置。可选地，图7对应实施例中的第一指示信息和图4对应实施例中的第一指示信息可以分别采用不同的指示信息表示。例如，图7对应实施例中的第一指示信息采用指示信息1表示，图4对应实施例中的第一指示信息采用指示信息2表示。可选地，指示信息1和指示信息2还可以分别携带发送前述指示信息的原因。此时，该终端设备能够基于收到的第一指示信息确定接入网设备是基于何种规则向该终端设备发送的第一指示信息。
如图8所示，为本申请提出的信息更新方法的另一种实施方式。本实施方式中，接入网设备不感知注册更新流程，仅用于透传终端设备与核心网设备之间的消息。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤801，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备发送第三信息；相应地，终端设备通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收第三信息。
其中，该第三信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送终端设备的第三位置信息，该第三位置信息用于指示终端设备向核心网设备上报的目标位置。具体地，该第三信息可以是规则信息，用于确定该终端设备向核心网设备上报第三位置信息的规则。也就是说，当该终端设备收到前述第三信息之后，该终端设备能够基于该第三信息确定如何获得前述目标位置，以及如何将指示前述目标位置的第一位置信息上报给该核心网设备。
此外，该第三位置信息用于核心网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。可选地，该寻呼区域与该注册区域可以是同一个区域。可选的，寻呼区域与该注册区域可以是不同区域，例如，寻呼区域包括注册区域且比注册区域范围大。其中，关于寻呼区域和注册区域的介绍请参阅前述步骤201，此处不予赘述。
此外，前述目标位置为终端设备通过第三信息确定的位置，该位置用于终端设备确定注册更新流程的触发条件。具体地，终端设备通过第三信息确定目标位置的处理过程的介绍请参阅步骤802。具体地，终端设备基于目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件的处理过程的介绍请参阅步骤803。
具体地，该目标位置可以采用如下任意一种实施方式：
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于前述第一距离门限。
应注意，该目标位置可以采用前述任意一种实施方式，也可以同时满足前述两种实施方式，具体此处不做限定。关于该目标位置、该第一参考位置和该第一距离门限的解释请参阅前文步骤201中的相关介绍，具体此处不予赘述。
应理解，本实施例中的第三信息相比于图2、图4至图7中任一对应实施例中的第一信息的区别在于，第三信息接入网设备不感知(即接入网设备不感知第三信息的内容)，而第一信息接入网设备感知(即接入网设备感知第一信息的内容)。
应理解，当第三信息包含的内容不同时，第三信息指示的规则不同，该终端设备获得前述目标位置的方式也不尽相同。下面分别进行介绍：
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送目标位置，该目标位置包括该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的终端设备的位置。也可以理解为，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送该终端设备的位置，并且，该终端设备在被释放的预设时间范围内获得的位置为目标位置。
其中，该终端设备被释放指该终端设备从连接态进入空闲态。
具体地，核心网设备通过接入网设备向终端设备的NAS发送第三指示信息；相应地，终 端设备的NAS通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收第三指示信息。
本实施例中，核心网设备指示终端设备在被释放之前通过接入网设备上报该终端设备的位置，有利于该核心网设备获知终端设备的位置。有利于核心网设备对终端设备进行注册区域管理和/或寻呼区域管理。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为目标位置。示例性的，该终端设备收到第四指示信息之后确定的终端设备的位置，可以是该终端设备收到第四指示信息之后确定的第一个位置，也可以是该终端设备收到第四指示信息时该终端设备的所在的位置。
由于，终端设备在连接态时，核心网设备能够与终端设备的NAS进行通信，因此，该核心网设备能够感知该终端设备是否将要被释放。当该核心网设备确定该终端设备需要被释放时，该核心网设备将通过接入网设备向该终端设备的NAS发送前述第四指示信息，以使得该终端设备的NAS在被释放之前通过接入网设备向核心网设备上报终端设备的位置。其中，核心网设备确定该终端设备需要被释放，可以是该接入网设备向核心网设备请求释放终端设备；也可以是该核心网设备自主确定终端设备需要释放。具体此处不做限定。本实施方式中，该终端设备仅在收到第四指示信息后获取该终端设备当前的位置作为目标位置，有利于降低终端设备的复杂度。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四规则信息，该第四规则信息用于指示该终端设备根据来自该核心网设备的第四指示信息确定该目标位置，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该终端设备当前的位置。
在该实施方式中，该核心网设备不仅能够在该终端设备即将被释放时向该终端设备的NAS发送第四指示信息，该核心网设备还将在发送第四指示信息之前向该终端设备的NAS发送第四规则信息，以使得该终端设备的NAS能够获知收到第四指示信息的原因。应注意，本实施方式中，第四规则信息在第四指示信息之前发送。可选地，该核心网设备通过不同的消息向该终端设备的NAS发送前述第四规则信息。
步骤802，终端设备根据第三信息确定目标位置。
具体地，终端设备的NAS根据第三信息确定目标位置。当前述第三信息的实现方式不同时，该终端设备的NAS确定目标位置的方式不同。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括前述第三指示信息。此时，该终端设备的NAS能够确定该终端设备是否需要被释放，当该终端设备的NAS确定该终端设备需要被释放时，该终端设备的NAS获取终端设备的位置，并且，将该终端设备的NAS获取的位置作为目标位置通过接入网设备发送给核心网设备。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备的NAS收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为目标位置。此时，若该终端设备的NAS收到来自核心网设备的第四指示信息，则说明该核心网设备已确定该终端设备将被释放，则该终端设备的NAS将收到第四指示信息之后获得的终端设备的位置确定为目标位置。
应理解，该终端设备的NAS可以通过GPS或GNSS等模块获取终端设备当前的位置，并将获得的终端设备当前的位置确定为目标位置。该终端设备的NAS也可以从终端设备的AS获取该终端设备当前的位置。此外，该终端设备的NAS还可以复用终端设备在被释放之 前的预设时间范围内确定的终端设备的位置。具体此处不做限定。
步骤803，终端设备基于目标位置确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
具体地，该终端设备的NAS根据目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发注册更新流程。也可以理解为，终端设备的NAS基于目标位置更新第一参考位置，得到第二参考位置。具体地，请参阅前文步骤204中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤804，终端设备通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送第三位置信息；相应地，核心网设备通过接入网设备从终端设备接收该第三位置信息。
具体地，终端设备的NAS通过接入网设备向核心网设备发送用于指示前述目标位置的第三位置信息；相应地，核心网设备通过接入网设备从终端设备的NAS接收用于指示前述目标位置的第三位置信息。
应理解，步骤803与步骤804无明确的时间先后顺序的限定。也就是说，终端设备可以先执行步骤803再执行步骤804，也可以先执行步骤804再执行步骤803，还可以同时执行步骤803和步骤804。具体本实施例不做限定。
步骤805，核心网设备基于第三位置信息确定终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
本实施例中，步骤805与前述实施例中的步骤208的内容类似，具体请参阅前文步骤208的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
步骤806，核心网设备根据第一对应关系和第三位置信息确定该第三位置信息对应的TAC。
本实施例中，步骤806为可选的步骤。
其中，第三位置信息可以由地理位置信息表示。该第三位置信息由地理位置信息表示的方式与第一位置信息由地理位置信息表示的方式类似，具体请参阅前述步骤201中的相关介绍。
步骤806与前述实施例中的步骤209的内容类似，具体请参阅前文步骤209的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
采用图8所述的实施方式，该终端设备的NAS能够在该终端设备被释放之前获取该终端设备当前的位置并确定该位置为目标位置，或者，该终端设备的NAS能够在第四指示信息的指示下获取该终端设备的位置以确定目标位置。由于，终端设备的NAS与核心网设备能够直接交互目标位置，以使得该终端设备的NAS与核心网设备分别基于目标位置更新第一参考位置。因此，有利于降低终端设备的NAS触发注册更新流程的频率，有利于延长触发注册更新流程之间的时长。
此外，在本申请提出的信息更新方法的基础之上，提出了一种寻呼方法。如图9所示，为本申请提出的寻呼方法的主要流程。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤901，核心网设备获取第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限。
其中，第二参考位置是基于目标位置确定的新的参考位置，例如，该第二参考位置是基于目标位置更新第一参考位置而获得的新的参考位置。再例如，该第二参考位置直接等于目标位置。该第二参考位置可以是基于图2、图4、图5、图6、图7以及图8对应的实施例中 任意一种实施例确定的第二参考位置。
此外，该第二距离门限是基于目标位置确定的新的距离门限，例如，该第二距离门限是基于目标位置更新第一距离门限而获得的新的距离门限。再例如，第二距离门限等于第一距离门限。可选地，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。该第二距离门限可以是基于图2、图4、图5、图6、图7以及图8对应的实施例中任意一种实施例确定的第二距离门限。
步骤902，核心网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定寻呼区域，进而确定用于寻呼终端设备的目标接入网设备。
其中，目标接入网设备是核心网设备确定的当前能够为该终端设备提供服务的接入网设备。该核心网设备可以仅确定一个目标接入网设备，也可以确定多个目标接入网设备，具体此处不做限定。应注意，由于该终端设备能够移动，因此，该目标接入网设备不一定包括前述实施例中向核心网设备提供目标位置的接入网设备。
在一种可能的实施方式中，核心网设备根据第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定第一地理区域；核心网设备确定位于该第一地理区域内的接入网设备为该目标接入网设备。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，若核心网设备基于目标位置仅确定了第二参考位置，则该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第一距离门限确定第一地理区域。例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为圆心且第一距离门限为半径的圆形区域为前述第一地理区域。又例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第一距离门限为该几何中心到该矩形的边的矩形区域为前述第一地理区域。
在本实施方式的另一种实现中，若核心网设备基于目标位置确定了第二参考位置和第二距离门限，则该核心网设备基于第二参考位置和第二距离门限确定第一地理区域。例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为圆心且第二距离门限为半径的圆形区域为前述第一地理区域。又例如，核心网设备确定以第二参考位置为矩形的几何中心且以第二距离门限为该几何中心到该矩形的边的矩形区域为前述第一地理区域。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，若核心网设备基于TAC列表确定了第二距离门限，则该核心网设备基于TAC列表和第二距离门限确定第一地理区域。其中，TAC列表和第二距离门限的确定方法参考步骤208所述，在此不再赘述。当核心网设备从接入网设备收到接入网设备根据终端设备上报的位置信息确定的新的TAC列表之后，核心网设备更新TAC列表。进一步的，该核心网设备基于更新的TAC列表和第二距离门限更新第一地理区域。其中，终端设备上报的位置信息可以指示前述可以用于更新第一参考位置的目标位置，也可以指示不用于更新第一参考位置的该用户设备的其他位置(或称为普通位置)。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，若核心网设备基于TAC列表未确定第二距离门限，则该核心网设备基于TAC列表和第一距离门限确定第一地理区域。其中，TAC列表的确定方法包括步骤208所述方法，还包括终端设备上报普通位置(非目标位置)，接入网设备根据终端设备上报的普通位置确定TAC列表，并将该列表上报给核心网设备，核心网设备接收并确定TAC列表。
应理解，在实际应用中，该终端设备可以采用前述任意一种实现方式确定前述第一地理区域。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，核心网设备获取该终端设备的位置变化信息，该位置变化 信息用于指示该终端设备的移动方向和/或移动速度；核心网设备根据该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限中的至少一项，以及该位置变化信息，确定第二地理区域；核心网设备确定位于该第二地理区域内的接入网设备为该目标接入网设备。
可选地，该核心网设备可以先根据第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限确定第一地理区域；然后，该核心网设备根据该位置变化信息和该第一地理区域确定第二地理区域。例如，当该终端设备沿第一方向且以第一速度移动时，该核心网设备将该第一地理区域按照前述第一方向和第一速度移动一段距离，得到该第二地理区域。
应注意，第二地理区域相比于第一地理区域更准确，但是，第二地理区不一定比第一地理区域更小。
还应注意，前述第一地理区域和第二地理区域均由地理区域表示，而不是TAC对应的区域，也不需要将地理区域转换为TAC或TAC对应的区域。
步骤903，核心网设备向目标接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息。
其中，第一寻呼消息携带第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限，以便于该目标接入网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限进一步筛选寻呼区域，进而能够更精准地寻呼终端设备。
应理解，当目标接入网设备为多个接入网设备时，核心网设备向每个目标接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息；相应地，该目标接入网设备从核心网设备接收第一寻呼消息。
步骤904，目标接入网设备基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从该目标接入网设备的多个小区中确定目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域。
其中，该目标接入网设备下可以由多个小区，该目标接入网设备可以基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从多个小区中选择一个或多个小区作为目标小区。示例性的，该目标接入网设备可以选择靠近第二参考位置的小区作为目标小区。
可选地，一个波束覆盖区域小于一个小区的覆盖区域。一个小区中可以有一个或多个波束覆盖区域。该目标接入网设备还可以从一个或多个小区中选择一个或多个波束覆盖区域。示例性的，目标接入网设备可以选择靠近第二参考位置的波束覆盖区域为目标波束覆盖区域。
步骤905，接入网设备发送用于寻呼终端设备的第二寻呼消息。
具体地，该接入网设备在该目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域内发送寻呼消息，该寻呼消息用于寻呼该终端设备。
本实施例中，核心网设备能够基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从多个接入网设备中筛选出目标接入网设备，然后，该目标接入网设备能够基于第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限从多个小区中筛选出目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域。因此，接入网设备可以在较小范围内寻呼终端设备，因此，能够减少信令开销，节约空口资源，提高系统性能。
此外，在本申请还提出了一种移动限制信息处理方法，如图10所示，为本申请提出的移动限制信息处理方法的主要流程。其中，核心网设备、接入网设备和终端设备将执行如下步骤。
步骤1001，核心网通过接入网设备向终端设备发送移动限制信息；相应地，终端设备通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收移动限制信息。
其中，移动限制信息包括禁止区域(Forbidden Area)信息和服务区域限制(Service Area  Restrictions)信息等。其中，禁止区域信息包括禁止区域。在禁止区域中，终端设备不被允许与网络侧发起任何通信。此外，服务区域限制信息包括受限服务区域和/或不受限服务区域。在受限服务区域中，终端设备可能不被允许发起服务请求，或者，该终端设备不被允许发起会话相关的信令等。
本实施例中，该移动限制信息是基于地理位置的区域信息，例如，移动限制信息可以采用国家区域、行政区域、基于经纬度确定的网格等地理位置区域表示，而不用转换为TAI或者TAI对应的区域。网络侧设备(例如，接入网设备或核心网设备)可以直接保存移动限制相关的地理位置区域信息，而不是TAI相关信息。例如，本实施例中，该移动限制信息可以为一个基于地理位置区域的移动限制列表。由于基于地理位置的区域信息相比于TAI能够描述更小的区域，因此，有利于提高网络侧(接入网设备或核心网设备)对终端设备进行移动性限制管理的精度，也有利于兼容基于参考位置和距离门限的注册更新方法。
应注意，该移动限制信息可以由核心网设备通过NAS消息发送给终端设备的NSA层。示例性的，该移动限制信息可以携带在注册接纳(Registration Accept)消息中发送给终端设备的NAS。
步骤1002，终端设备基于移动限制信息处理移动限制相关操作。
具体地，该终端设备的NAS利用该移动限制信息处理禁止区域和/或服务区域限制等相关操作。
在一种可能的实施方式中，移动限制信息包括服务区域限制信息，服务区域限制信息包括受限服务区域。此时，该终端设备可能执行如下移动限制相关操作。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，终端设备在受限服务区域范围内不发起会话相关的流程，也不能发起服务请求(service request，SR)。
在本实施方式的另一种实现中，若终端设备发起SR或会话相关流程，核心网设备(例如，AMF实体)可以判断终端设备当前是否在受限服务区域内。若终端设备位于受限服务区域内，则AMF实体拒绝终端设备发起的流程。此外，管理会话的SMF实体还将向AMF实体订阅终端设备移入受限服务区域的通知，当终端设备移入受限服务区域时，SMF实体发起会话的去激活。
在另一种可能的实施方式中，移动限制信息包括禁止区域信息，禁止区域信息包括禁止区域。此时，该终端设备可能执行如下移动限制相关操作。
在本实施方式的一种实现中，若终端设备确定自己处于禁止区域，则该终端设备不主动发起连接。
在本实施方式的另一种实现中，若该终端设备发起连接，则核心网设备(例如，AMF实体)可根据终端设备的位置拒绝终端设备的接入。
步骤1003，核心网设备向第一接入网设备发送移动限制信息；相应地，第一接入网设备从核心网设备接收移动限制信息。
其中，第一接入网设备可以是为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备，或者，该第一接入网设备是该终端设备当前驻留的接入网设备。该移动限制信息是基于地理位置的区域信息。
步骤1004，第一接入网设备基于移动限制信息处理移动限制相关操作。
具体地，第一接入网设备利用该移动限制信息处理禁止区域和/或服务区域限制等相关操 作。
在一种可能的实现方式中，处理禁止区域和/或服务区域限制的相关操作包括：该第一接入网设备根据移动限制信息中的禁止区域信息和/或服务区域限制信息确定是否释放终端设备或为终端设备选择目标小区。例如，在连接态，该第一接入网设备根据终端设备的GNSS位置信息判断终端设备是否位于禁止区域和/或受限服务区域内。若该终端设备处于禁止区域和/或受限服务区域内，则该第一接入网设备释放与终端设备的连接，或者，该第一接入网设备向核心网设备(例如，AMF实体)发送指示该终端设备移入禁止区域和/或受限服务区域的通知。
步骤1005，第一接入网设备向第二接入网设备发送移动限制信息；相应地，第二接入网设备从第一接入网设备接收移动限制信息。该移动限制信息是基于地理位置的区域信息。
其中，第二接入网设备包括终端设备经过切换后为该终端设备提供服务的接入网设备。可以理解为，该终端设备从前述第一接入网设备切换至第二接入网设备，即前述第一接入网设备为源接入网设备，第二接入网设备为目标接入网设备。
示例性的，该移动限制信息可以携带于第一接入网设备发送给第二接入网设备的切换请求(HandoverRequest)消息中。
在NTN系统中，卫星作为中继或接入网设备，采用地理位置的区域信息表示移动限制信息。由于基于地理位置的区域信息相比于TAI能够描述更小的区域，因此，有利于更精确地对终端设备进行移动限制管理，避免由于卫星的波束覆盖区域过大而移动限制信息包括的区域(例如，禁止区域、受限服务区域或不受限服务区域)过小而导致的移动限制失效问题。
如图11所示，为本实施例提供的一种通信装置110的结构示意图。应当理解的是，前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10对应的方法实施例中的接入网设备可以基于本实施例中图11所示的通信装置110的结构。还应理解的是，当后续演进制式的接入网设备执行本申请实施例所涉及的方法时，后续演进制式的接入网设备也可以采用本实施例中图11所示的通信装置110的结构。
该通信装置110包括至少一个处理器1101、至少一个存储器1102、至少一个收发器1103、至少一个网络接口1105和一个或多个天线1104。处理器1101、存储器1102、收发器1103和网络接口1105通过连接装置相连，天线1104与收发器1103相连。其中，前述连接装置可包括各类接口、传输线或总线等，本实施例对此不做限定。
其中，存储器1102主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1102可以是独立存在，与处理器1101相连。可选地，该存储器1102可以和该处理器1101集成于一体，例如集成于一个或多个芯片之内。其中，该存储器1102能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码，并由处理器1101来控制执行，被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1101的驱动程序。应当理解的是，本实施例中的图11仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器，但是，在实际应用中，该通信装置110可以存在多个处理器或多个存储器，具体此处不做限定。此外，该存储器1102也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。该存储器1102可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件(即片内存储元件)，或者为独立的存储元件，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
本实施例中，该收发器1103可以用于支持该通信装置110与终端设备之间射频信号的接收或者发送，收发器1103可以与天线1104相连。收发器1103包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地，一个或多个天线1104可以接收射频信号，该收发器1103的接收机Rx用于从天线1104接收所述射频信号，并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号，并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给所述处理器1101，以便处理器1101对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理，例如解调处理和译码处理。此外，收发器1103中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1101接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号，并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号，并通过一个或多个天线1104发送所述射频信号。具体地，接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号，前述下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号，所述上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。
应当理解的是，前述收发器1103也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选地，可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
此外，前述处理器1101主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对整个网络设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据，例如用于支持该通信装置110执行前述实施例中所描述的动作。通信装置110可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器，其中，基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器主要用于对整个通信装置110进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。如图11中的处理器1101可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能，本领域技术人员可以理解，基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器，通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解，通信装置110可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式，通信装置110可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力，通信装置110的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中，也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储器中，由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。
此外，前述网络接口1105用于使该通信装置110通过通信链路，与其它通信装置相连。具体地，该网络接口1105可以包括该通信装置110与核心网网元之间的网络接口，例如S1接口；该网络接口1105也可以包括该通信装置110和其他网络设备(例如其他接入网设备或者核心网网元)之间的网络接口，例如X2或者Xn接口。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该通信装置110用于执行前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10对应实施例中的方法。具体地，在该通信装置110中，处理器1101用于控制收发器1103接收来自核心网设备的第一信息，该第一信息用于指示该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送终端设备的第一位置信息。然后，该处理器1101确定该第一位置信息。此外，该处理器 1101还用于控制收发器1103向该核心网设备发送该第一位置信息，该第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。
在一种可能的实施方式中，处理器1101具体用于：根据该第一信息向该终端设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息；根据从终端设备接收的第二位置信息确定该第一位置信息，该第二位置信息包括该目标位置，该目标位置为该终端设备基于该第二信息确定的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。处理器1101具体用于当该根据该第一规则信息确定该终端设备的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，控制收发器1103向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括该第一规则信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置；该第二信息包括该第二规则信息。收发器1103具体用于从该终端设备接收每个该终端设备的位置；处理器1101具体用于确定从终端设备接收的该终端设备的每个位置为目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第三规则信息，该第三规则信息用于该接入网设备确定该目标位置包括在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。处理器1101具体用于当根据该第三规则信息确定该终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时，控制收发器1103向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二信息还包括该第二指示信息，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，收发器1103，还用于从该核心网设备接收第一寻呼消息，该第一寻呼消息包括该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限；该处理器1101，还用于基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限从该接入网设备的多个小区中确定目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖 区域；收发器1103，还用于向该目标小区和/或该目标波束覆盖区域发送用于寻呼该终端设备的第二寻呼消息。
需要说明的是，本实施例的具体实施方式和有益效果可参考上述实施例中接入网设备的方法，此处不再赘述。
如图12所示，为本实施例提供的另一种通信装置120的结构示意图。应当理解的是，前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10对应的方法实施例中的终端设备可以基于本实施例中图120所示的通信装置120的结构。
该通信装置120包括至少一个处理器1201、至少一个存储器1202和至少一个收发器1203。其中，处理器1201、存储器1202和收发器1203相连。可选地，该通信装置120还可以包括输入设备1205、输出设备1206和一个或多个天线1204。其中，天线1204与收发器1203相连，输入设备1205、输出设备1206与处理器1201相连。
本实施例中，该存储器1202主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1202可以是独立存在，与处理器1201相连。可选地，该存储器1202可以和该处理器1201集成于一体，例如集成于一个或多个芯片之内。其中，该存储器1202能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码，并由处理器1201来控制执行，被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1201的驱动程序。应当理解的是，本实施例中的图12仅示出了一个存储器和一个处理器，但是，在实际应用中，该通信装置120可以存在多个处理器或多个存储器，具体此处不做限定。此外，该存储器1202也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。该存储器1202可以为与处理器处于同一芯片上的存储元件(即片内存储元件)，或者为独立的存储元件，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
本实施例中，该收发器1203可以用于支持该通信装置120与接入网设备之间射频信号的接收或者发送，收发器1203可以与天线1204相连。收发器1203包括发射机Tx和接收机Rx。具体地，一个或多个天线1204可以接收射频信号，该收发器1203的接收机Rx用于从天线1204接收所述射频信号，并将射频信号转换为数字基带信号或数字中频信号，并将该数字基带信号或数字中频信号提供给所述处理器1201，以便处理器1201对该数字基带信号或数字中频信号做进一步的处理，例如解调处理和译码处理。此外，收发器1203中的发射机Tx还用于从处理器1201接收经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号，并将该经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号转换为射频信号，并通过一个或多个天线1204发送所述射频信号。具体地，接收机Rx可以选择性地对射频信号进行一级或多级下混频处理和模数转换处理以得到数字基带信号或数字中频信号，前述下混频处理和模数转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。发射机Tx可以选择性地对经过调制的数字基带信号或数字中频信号时进行一级或多级上混频处理和数模转换处理以得到射频信号，所述上混频处理和数模转换处理的先后顺序是可调整的。数字基带信号和数字中频信号可以统称为数字信号。
应当理解的是，前述收发器1203也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选地，可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
该处理器1201可以是基带处理器，也可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)，基带处理器和CPU可以集成在一起或者分开。该处理器1201可以用于为该终端设备实现各种功能，例如用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，或者用于对整个终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据；或者用于协助完成计算处理任务，例如对图形图像处理或者音频处理等等；或者处理器1201用于实现上述功能中的一种或者多种。
此外，该输出设备1206和处理器1201通信，可以以多种方式来显示信息，具体从此处不做限定。
具体地，该通信装置120用于执行前述图2、图4、图5、图6或图7对应实施例中终端设备的方法。此时，该通信装置120中的收发器1203，用于接收来自接入网设备的第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息；该收发器1203，还用于向该接入网设备发送该第二位置信息。此外，该通信装置120中的处理器1201，用于基于该第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该处理器1201，具体用于基于该目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发该注册更新流程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。该处理器1201，还用于当确定终端设备当前的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，确定该终端设备当前的位置为该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。该处理器1201，还用于将在收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置确定为该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该处理器1201，具体用于控制该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置；以及，控制该终端设备的NAS基于该目标位置更新该第一参考位置，得到该第二参考位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
具体地，该通信装置120用于执行前述图8对应实施例中终端设备的方法。此时，该通信装置120中的收发器1203，用于通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收第三信息，该第三信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送第三位置信息；此外，该收发器1203，还用于通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该第三位置信息；此外，处理器1201，用于基于该第三位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考 位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该处理器1201，具体用于基于该目标位置确定第二参考位置，该第二参考位置用于触发该注册更新流程。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该目标位置，该目标位置包括该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置；该处理器1201，还用于当确定需要被释放时，确定在被释放之前的预设时间范围内的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为该目标位置；该处理器1201，还用于将在收到该第四指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置确定为该目标位置。
需要说明的是，本实施例的具体实施方式和有益效果可参考上述实施例中终端设备的方法，此处不再赘述。
如图13所示，为本实施例提供的另一种通信装置130的结构示意图。应当理解的是，前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10对应的方法实施例中的核心网设备可以基于本实施例中图130所示的通信装置130的结构。如图13所示，该通信装置130可以包括处理器1310、存储器1320和收发器1330。其中，该处理器1310与该存储器1320耦合连接，该处理器1310与该收发器1330耦合连接。
其中，前述收发器1330也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发装置等。可选地，可以将收发单元中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
其中，前述处理器1310可以是中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device，PLD)或其组合。上述PLD可以是复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device，CPLD)，现场可编程逻辑门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)，通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic，GAL)或其任意组合。处理器1310可以是指一个处理器，也可以包括多个处理器，具体此处不做限定。
此外，前述该存储器1320主要用于存储软件程序和数据。存储器1320可以是独立存在，与处理器1310相连。可选地，该存储器1320可以和该处理器1310集成于一体，例如集成于一个或多个芯片之内。其中，该存储器1320能够存储执行本申请实施例的技术方案的程序代码，并由处理器1310来控制执行，被执行的各类计算机程序代码也可被视为是处理器1310的驱动程序。存储器1320可以包括易失性存储器(volatile memory)，例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)；存储器也可以包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)，快闪存储器(flash memory)，硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)；存储器1320还可以包括上述种类的存储 器的组合。存储器1320可以是指一个存储器，也可以包括多个存储器。示例性的，存储器1320，用于存储各种数据。例如，第一参考位置、第一距离门限。此外，该存储器1320还用于存储第一规则信息、第二规则信息、第三规则信息以及第四规则信息等。具体地，请参阅前文实施例中的相关介绍，此处不予赘述。
在一个实现方式中，存储器1320中存储有计算机可读指令，所述计算机可读指令包括多个软件模块，例如，收发模块1321和处理模块1322。处理器1310执行各个软件模块后可以按照各个软件模块的指示进行相应的操作。在本实施例中，一个软件模块所执行的操作实际上是指处理器1310根据所述软件模块的指示而执行的操作。
具体地，该通信装置130用于执行前述图2、图4、图5、图6或图7对应实施例中核心网设备的方法。此时，该通信装置130中的收发模块1321和处理模块1322的主要功能如下：
收发模块1321，用于接收来自核心网设备的第一信息，该第一信息用于指示该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送终端设备的第一位置信息；处理模块1322，用于确定该第一位置信息；该收发模块1321，还用于向该核心网设备发送该第一位置信息，该第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该处理模块1322，具体用于：根据该第一信息向该终端设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二位置信息；根据从终端设备接收的第二位置信息确定该第一位置信息，该第二位置信息包括该目标位置，该目标位置为该终端设备基于该第二信息确定的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第一规则信息，该第一规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的该终端设备的位置，该第三距离门限小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置；该处理模块1322，具体用于当该根据该第一规则信息确定该终端设备的位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离达到该第三距离门限时，控制收发模块1321向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括该第一规则信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第二规则信息，该第二规则信息用于确定该目标位置包括该终端设备向该接入网设备发送的每个该终端设备的位置；该第二信息包括该第二规则信息。该收发模块1321具体用于从该终端设备接收的每个该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息包括第三规则信息，该第三规则信息用于该接入网设备确定该目标位置包括在释放或挂起该终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二信息包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第一指示信息之后确定的该终端设备的位置为该目标位置。该处理模块1322，具体用于当根据该第三规则信息确定该终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时，控制收发模块1321向该终端设备发送该第二信息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第一信息还包括第二指示信息，该第二信息还包括该第二指示信息，该第二指示信息还用于指示该终端设备的AS向该终端设备的NAS发送该目标位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该收发模块1321，还用于从该核心网设备接收第一寻呼消息，该第一寻呼消息包括该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限；该处理模块1322，还用于基于该第二参考位置和/或该第二距离门限从该接入网设备的多个小区中确定目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域；该收发模块1321，还用于向该目标小区和/或该目标波束覆盖区域发送用于寻呼该终端设备的第二寻呼消息。
在一种可能的实施方式中，目标位置采用地理位置信息表示，地理位置信息包括经纬度。处理模块1322，根据第一对应关系和第一位置信息确定第一位置信息对应的跟踪区域码TAC，第一对应关系为地理区域与跟踪区域码TAC之间的对应关系。
具体地，该通信装置130用于执行前述图8对应实施例中核心网设备的方法。此时，该通信装置130中的收发模块1321和处理模块1322的主要功能如下：
收发模块1321，用于通过为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备向该终端设备发送第三信息，该第三信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该终端设备的第三位置信息；收发模块1321，还用于通过该接入网设备从该终端设备接收该第三位置信息；处理模块1322，用于基于该第三位置信息确定该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三位置信息包括目标位置，该目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的该终端设备的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该目标位置与该第一参考位置之间的距离小于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，该第二参考位置和该第二距离门限是基于该第一位置信息确定的。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第二距离门限大于该第一距离门限。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过该接入网设备向该核心网设备发送该目标位置，该目标位置包括该终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置。
在一种可能的实施方式中，该第三信息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备收到该第四指示信息之后确定的位置为该目标位置；
该收发模块1321，具体用于当确定该终端设备需要被释放时，通过该接入网设备向该终端设备发送该第四指示信息。
需要说明的是，本实施例的具体实施方式和有益效果可参考上述实施例中核心网设备的方法，此处不再赘述。
在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。还应理解，本文中涉及的第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。
此外，本申请提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行该计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例该的流程或功能。例如，实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的接入网设备相关的方法。又例如，实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的终端设备相关的方法。又例如，实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的核心网设备相关的方法。该计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如，同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如，红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存储的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，数字通用光盘(digital versatile disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
此外，本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被处理器执行以实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的接入网设备相关的方法。
此外，本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被处理器执行以实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的终端设备相关的方法。
此外，本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被处理器执行以实现如前述图2、图4、图5、图6、图7、图8、图9或图10中的核心网设备相关的方法。
应理解，本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统，装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。

Claims (60)

  1. 一种信息更新方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于接入网设备，所述方法包括：
    接收来自核心网设备的第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示向所述核心网设备发送终端设备的第一位置信息；
    确定所述第一位置信息；
    向所述核心网设备发送所述第一位置信息，所述第一位置信息用于核心网设备确定所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一位置信息包括目标位置，所述目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的所述终端设备的位置。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离小于所述第一距离门限。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，所述第二参考位置和所述第二距离门限是基于所述第一位置信息确定的。
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述第一位置信息，包括：
    根据所述第一信息向所述终端设备发送第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第二位置信息；
    从所述终端设备接收所述第二位置信息，所述第二位置信息包括所述目标位置，所述目标位置为所述终端设备基于所述第二信息确定的所述终端设备的位置；
    根据第二位置信息确定所述第一位置信息。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第一规则信息，所述第一规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括所述终端设备与所述第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限时的所述终端设备的位置，所述第三距离门限小于所述第一距离门限。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备收到所述第一指示信息之后确定的所述终端设备的位置为所述目标位置；
    所述根据所述第一信息向所述终端设备发送第二信息，包括：
    当根据所述第一规则信息确定所述终端设备的位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离达到所述第三距离门限时，向所述终端设备发送所述第二信息。
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括所述第一规则信息。
  9. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第二规则信息，所述第二规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送的每个所述终端设备的位置；所述第二信息包括所述第二规则信息；
    所述从所述终端设备接收所述第二位置信息，包括：
    从所述终端设备接收每个所述终端设备的位置，并确定接收的每个所述终端设备的位置为所述目标位置。
  10. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第三规则信息，所述第 三规则信息用于所述接入网设备确定所述目标位置包括在释放或挂起所述终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的所述终端设备的位置。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备收到所述第一指示信息之后确定的所述终端设备的位置为所述目标位置；
    所述根据所述第一信息向所述终端设备发送第二信息，包括：
    当根据所述第三规则信息确定所述终端设备需要被释放或被挂起时，向所述终端设备发送所述第二信息。
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二距离门限大于所述第一距离门限。
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二信息还包括所述第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备的接入层AS向所述终端设备的非接入层NAS发送所述目标位置。
  14. 根据权利要求4至13中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述向所述核心网设备发送所述第一位置信息之后，所述方法还包括：
    从所述核心网设备接收第一寻呼消息，所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限；
    基于所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限从所述接入网设备的多个小区中确定目标小区和/或目标波束覆盖区域；
    向所述目标小区和/或所述目标波束覆盖区域发送用于寻呼所述终端设备的第二寻呼消息。
  15. 一种信息更新方法，其特征在于，所述方法用于终端设备，所述方法包括：
    接收来自接入网设备的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第二位置信息；
    向所述接入网设备发送所述第二位置信息，以及，
    基于所述第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二位置信息包括目标位置，所述目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的所述终端设备的位置。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离小于所述第一距离门限。
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第二位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件，包括：
    基于所述目标位置确定第二参考位置，所述第二参考位置用于触发所述注册更新流程。
  19. 根据权利要求16至18中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一规则信息，所述第一规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括与所述第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限的所述终端设备的位置，所述第三距离门限小于所述第一距离门限；
    所述方法还包括：
    当所述终端设备当前的位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离达到所述第三距离门限时， 确定所述终端设备当前的位置为所述目标位置。
  20. 根据权利要求16至18中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端设备收到所述第一指示信息之后确定的所述终端设备的位置为所述目标位置；
    所述方法还包括：
    将在收到所述第一指示信息之后确定的所述终端设备的位置确定为所述目标位置。
  21. 根据权利要求16至18中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息包括第二规则信息，所述第二规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送的每个所述终端设备的位置。
  22. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备基于所述目标位置确定第二参考位置，包括：
    所述终端设备的接入层AS向所述终端设备的非接入层NAS发送所述目标位置；
    所述终端设备的NAS基于所述目标位置更新所述第一参考位置，得到所述第二参考位置。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二信息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备的AS向所述终端设备的NAS发送所述目标位置。
  24. 一种信息更新方法，其特征在于，所述方法用于核心网设备，所述方法包括：
    向为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述终端设备的第一位置信息；
    从所述接入网设备接收所述第一位置信息；
    基于所述第一位置信息确定所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一位置信息包括目标位置，所述目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的所述终端设备的位置。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离小于所述第一距离门限。
  27. 根据权利要求24至26中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，所述第二参考位置和所述第二距离门限是基于所述第一位置信息确定的。
  28. 根据权利要求25至27中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第一规则信息，所述第一规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括与所述第一参考位置之间的距离达到第三距离门限的所述终端设备的位置，所述第三距离门限小于所述第一距离门限。
  29. 根据权利要求25至27中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第二规则信息，所述第二规则信息用于确定所述目标位置包括所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送的每个所述终端设备的位置。
  30. 根据权利要求25至27中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息包括第三规则信息，所述第三规则信息用于所述接入网设备确定所述目标位置包括在释放或挂起所述终端设备之前的预设时间范围内获取的所述终端设备的位置。
  31. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二距离门限大于所述第一距离门 限。
  32. 根据权利要求24至31中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一信息还包括第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备的AS向所述终端设备的NAS发送所述目标位置。
  33. 根据权利要求27至32中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    基于所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限确定用于寻呼所述终端设备的目标接入网设备；
    向所述目标接入网设备发送第一寻呼消息，所述第一寻呼消息包括所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限用于确定第一地理区域；
    所述基于所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限确定用于寻呼所述终端设备的目标接入网设备，包括：
    确定位于所述第一地理区域内的接入网设备为所述目标接入网设备。
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二参考位置和所述第二距离门限中的至少一项以及位置变化信息用于确定第二地理区域，所述位置变化信息包括指示所述终端设备的移动方向的信息和/或指示所述终端设备的移动速度的信息；
    所述基于所述第二参考位置和/或所述第二距离门限确定用于寻呼所述终端设备的目标接入网设备，包括：
    确定位于所述第二地理区域内的接入网设备为所述目标接入网设备。
  36. 根据权利要求24至35中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置采用地理位置信息表示，所述地理位置信息包括经纬度；
    所述从所述接入网设备接收所述第一位置信息之后，所述方法还包括：
    根据第一对应关系和所述第一位置信息确定所述第一位置信息对应的跟踪区域码TAC，所述第一对应关系为地理区域与跟踪区域码TAC之间的对应关系。
  37. 一种信息更新方法，其特征在于，所述方法用于终端设备，所述方法包括：
    通过接入网设备从核心网设备接收第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述终端设备通过所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送第三位置信息；
    通过所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述第三位置信息，以及，所述终端设备基于所述第三位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三位置信息包括目标位置，所述目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的所述终端设备的位置。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离小于所述第一距离门限。
  40. 根据权利要求38或39所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述第三位置信息确定注册更新流程的触发条件，包括：
    基于所述目标位置确定第二参考位置，所述第二参考位置用于触发所述注册更新流程。
  41. 根据权利要求38至40中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备通过所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述目标位置，所述目标位置包括所述终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置；
    所述方法还包括：
    当所述终端设备确定需要被释放时，确定在被释放之前的预设时间范围内的所述终端设备的位置为所述目标位置。
  42. 根据权利要求38至40中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备收到所述第四指示信息之后确定的位置为所述目标位置；
    所述方法还包括：
    将在收到所述第四指示信息之后确定的所述终端设备的位置确定为所述目标位置。
  43. 一种信息更新方法，其特征在于，所述方法用于核心网设备，所述方法包括：
    通过为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第三信息，所述第三信息用于指示所述终端设备通过所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述终端设备的第三位置信息；
    通过所述接入网设备从所述终端设备接收所述第三位置信息；
    基于所述第三位置信息确定所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三位置信息包括目标位置，所述目标位置为基于第一参考位置和第一距离门限触发注册更新流程之前获得的所述终端设备的位置。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标位置与所述第一参考位置之间的距离小于所述第一距离门限。
  46. 根据权利要求43至45中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的寻呼区域和/或注册区域由第二参考位置和/或第二距离门限表示，所述第二参考位置和所述第二距离门限是基于所述第一位置信息确定的。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二距离门限大于所述第一距离门限。
  48. 根据权利要求44至47中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备通过所述接入网设备向所述核心网设备发送所述目标位置，所述目标位置包括所述终端设备在被释放之前的预设时间范围内确定的位置。
  49. 根据权利要求44至47中任意一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三信息包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备收到所述第四指示信息之后确定的位置为所述目标位置；
    所述通过为终端设备提供服务的接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第三信息，包括：
    当所述核心网设备确定所述终端设备需要被释放时，通过所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送所述第四指示信息。
  50. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法的单元或者模块。
  51. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行如权利要求15至23中任意一项所述的方法的单元或者模块；或者，执行如权利要求37至42中任意一项所述的方法的单元或者模块。
  52. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括用于执行如权利要求24至36中任意一项所述的方法的单元或者模块；或者，执行如权利要求43至49中任意一项所述的方法的单元或者模块。
  53. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和存储器；
    其中，存储器存储有计算机程序；
    所述处理器调用所述计算机程序以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法。
  54. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和存储器；
    其中，存储器存储有计算机程序；
    所述处理器调用所述计算机程序以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求15至23中任意一项所述的方法；或者，执行如权利要求37至42中任意一项所述的方法。
  55. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和存储器；
    其中，存储器存储有计算机程序；
    所述处理器调用所述计算机程序以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求24至36中任意一项所述的方法；或者，执行如权利要求43至49中任意一项所述的方法。
  56. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    执行如权利要求1至14中任意一项所述的方法的接入网设备；
    执行如权利要求24至36中任意一项所述的方法的核心网设备。
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的通信系统，其特征在于，还包括终端设备，所述终端设备用于执行如权利要求15至23中任意一项所述的方法。
  58. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括终端设备，接入网设备，以及核心网设备，其中：
    所述终端设备用于执行如权利要求37至42中任意一项所述的方法；以及，
    所述核心网设备用于执行如权利要求43至49中任意一项所述的方法。
  59. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，存储有指令，当所述指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至49中任意一项所述的方法。
  60. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至49中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/072088 2022-01-29 2023-01-13 一种信息更新方法以及通信装置 WO2023143125A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210111696.XA CN116567539A (zh) 2022-01-29 2022-01-29 一种信息更新方法以及通信装置
CN202210111696.X 2022-01-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023143125A1 true WO2023143125A1 (zh) 2023-08-03

Family

ID=87470453

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/072088 WO2023143125A1 (zh) 2022-01-29 2023-01-13 一种信息更新方法以及通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116567539A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023143125A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101800973A (zh) * 2009-02-05 2010-08-11 华为技术有限公司 一种用户终端的位置信息获取方法、装置和系统
CN103857036A (zh) * 2012-11-28 2014-06-11 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 寻呼移动中继下终端的方法及设备
US20200213000A1 (en) * 2018-12-31 2020-07-02 Hughes Network Systems, Llc Location management for satellite systems
WO2021203443A1 (zh) * 2020-04-10 2021-10-14 华为技术有限公司 一种定位信息上报的方法及通信装置
US20210377845A1 (en) * 2019-02-15 2021-12-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Tracking area determining method, terminal device, and core network device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101800973A (zh) * 2009-02-05 2010-08-11 华为技术有限公司 一种用户终端的位置信息获取方法、装置和系统
CN103857036A (zh) * 2012-11-28 2014-06-11 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 寻呼移动中继下终端的方法及设备
US20200213000A1 (en) * 2018-12-31 2020-07-02 Hughes Network Systems, Llc Location management for satellite systems
US20210377845A1 (en) * 2019-02-15 2021-12-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Tracking area determining method, terminal device, and core network device
WO2021203443A1 (zh) * 2020-04-10 2021-10-14 华为技术有限公司 一种定位信息上报的方法及通信装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116567539A (zh) 2023-08-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11736991B2 (en) Radio terminal, base station, and methods and non-transitory computer-readable media therefor
US11825404B2 (en) Radio access network node, radio terminal, and methods and non transitory computer-readable media therefor
US20230247505A1 (en) Telecommunications system, terminal device, infrastructure equipment and methods
US20150245262A1 (en) Method and apparatus for small cell discovery in heterogeneous networks
WO2021244294A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
US11706639B2 (en) Communication method, secondary network node and terminal
US20190274071A1 (en) Enhanced reactivation for light connection
US20230180280A1 (en) Link switching method in sidelink communication and apparatus
US20230164685A1 (en) Access Control Method and Apparatus for Terminal Device
WO2023143125A1 (zh) 一种信息更新方法以及通信装置
US20130143582A1 (en) Transmitting radio configuration parameters from a base station to a relay node
US20220182892A1 (en) Communication Method and Apparatus
KR20230124693A (ko) 포지셔닝 설정 방법 및 전자 장치
WO2022155853A1 (zh) 无线通信方法、通信装置及通信系统
WO2014121491A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置和通信设备
WO2023051259A1 (zh) 切换方法、通信装置、以及计算机存储介质
WO2024032235A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
US20230116776A1 (en) Method and device for controlling terminal connection state for providing ultra-low-latency location information service in wireless communication system
WO2022089200A1 (zh) 用于小区切换的方法和装置
WO2023185424A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和装置
WO2024016933A1 (zh) 一种小区搜索方法以及通信装置
WO2024024458A1 (ja) 無線アクセスネットワークノード、ｕｅ、ネットワークノード、及びこれらの方法
WO2023066223A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置、以及机算机存储介质
US20210075723A1 (en) Wireless Communication Method and Device
WO2022262506A1 (zh) 中继通信的方法、装置和系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23746007

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1